WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure,
avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include
a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction Manual and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................7
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................12
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................................94
4STARTING AND OPERATING .................................................................................................111
5MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................157
6SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................187
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................236
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................259
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................303
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................308
11INDEX..............................................................................................................................................313
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY ....................................................................... 8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .........................8
SYMBOL GLOSSARY............................................................. 8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................................12
Key Fob........................................................................ 12
SENTRY KEY ........................................................................15
IGNITION SWITCH ...............................................................15
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .................................... 15
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ......................................16
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 17
To Exit Remote Start Mode ........................................ 17
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped .................................................................. 18
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped.......... 18
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer Activation —
If Equipped .................................................................. 18
Remote Start Cancel Message .................................. 18
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..................19
To Arm The System .................................................... 19
To Disarm The System................................................ 19
Rearming Of The System............................................ 19
Security System Manual Override.............................. 19
DOORS .................................................................................20
Manual Door Locks......................................................20
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ................................21
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry ......................21
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit — If Equipped .........23
Manual Sliding Side Door............................................23
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped ......................24
Hands-Free Sliding Doors — If Equipped....................25
Child Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors.....25
STEERING WHEEL .............................................................. 26
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ..............................26
Heated Steering Wheel —If Equipped.........................26
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED ................27
Programming The Memory Feature............................27
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To Memory.........27
Memory Position Recall...............................................28
SEATS................................................................................... 28
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped.......28
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ...............................29
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped .........40
Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) — If Equipped..........42
Heated Seats ...............................................................43
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped...................................44
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks...........................45
Head Restraints ..........................................................45
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION —
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................................... 47
Introducing Voice Recognition ....................................47
Basic Voice Commands...............................................47
Get Started...................................................................47
Additional Information.................................................48
MIRRORS............................................................................. 48
Inside Rearview Mirror................................................ 48
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors —If Equipped ................... 48
Outside Mirrors ........................................................... 49
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal — If Equipped ....... 49
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped................................................................... 49
Conversation Mirror .................................................... 49
Power Mirrors — If Equipped....................................... 49
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped ........... 50
Automatic Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped ....... 50
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature................................. 50
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................................... 50
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse —If Equipped.................. 51
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK®) —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................................... 51
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® ............ 51
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....................... 51
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
Non-Rolling Code Device............................................. 52
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener ................................................................ 52
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device ................................................. 53
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button........... 53
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .................... 53
Security ........................................................................ 54
Troubleshooting Tips................................................... 54
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ..............................................................54
Multifunction Lever..................................................... 54
Headlight Switch ......................................................... 55
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If Equipped.......... 55
High/Low Beam Switch .............................................. 56
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ........................ 56
Flash-To-Pass .............................................................. 56
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......................... 56
Headlights On With Wipers —If Equipped.................. 56
Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped .......................... 56
Lights-On Reminder .................................................... 57
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................. 57
Turn Signals................................................................. 57
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............................. 57
Battery Saver .............................................................. 57
INTERIOR LIGHTS ...............................................................58
Interior Courtesy Lights .............................................. 58
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS .............................59
Windshield Wiper Operation....................................... 59
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped........................... 60
Rear Wiper And Washer ............................................. 60
CLIMATE CONTROLS .........................................................60
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions.............................................................. 61
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions.............................................................. 66
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped ................................................................. 70
Climate Voice Commands .......................................... 70
Operating Tips ............................................................ 70
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ............................71
Storage .........................................................................71
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped..............................74
Sun Screens — If Equipped .........................................74
USB/AUX Control ........................................................74
Power Outlets ..............................................................75
Power Inverter — If Equipped .....................................77
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped.........................77
WINDOWS............................................................................ 78
Power Windows............................................................78
Automatic Window Features.......................................79
Reset Auto-Up ..............................................................79
Wind Buffeting .............................................................79
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED..........................80
Opening And Closing The Sunroof..............................80
Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade —
If Equipped...................................................................81
Pinch Protect Feature..................................................81
Venting Sunroof ...........................................................81
Ignition Off Operation ..................................................81
Sunroof Maintenance..................................................81
HOOD.................................................................................... 82
Opening ........................................................................82
Closing..........................................................................82
LIFTGATE.............................................................................. 83
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate ......................................83
To Lock/Close The Liftgate .........................................83
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ......................................83
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped .............................84
Cargo Area Features ...................................................86
STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED ............... 90
Deploying The Crossbars ............................................ 91
Stowing The Crossbars ............................................... 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..................................................... 94
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ................................ 96
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .................................... 97
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls ... 97
Engine Oil Life ............................................................. 98
KeySense Cluster Messages — If Equipped .............. 98
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ................... 99
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped ...101
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ..............................102
Red Warning Lights...................................................102
Yellow Warning Lights ...............................................105
Yellow Indicator Lights ..............................................107
Green Indicator Lights...............................................107
White Indicator Lights ...............................................108
Blue Indicator Lights .................................................109
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II...................109
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ...............................................109
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS.......................................................................110
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ................................................... 111
Normal Starting ........................................................ 111
AutoPark .................................................................... 111
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ........................................ 113
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine ................ 113
If Engine Fails To Start ............................................. 114
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button.................................................. 114
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ..................... 114
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .................... 114
PARKING BRAKE ............................................................. 115
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ........................................ 115
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION.......................................... 117
Ignition Park Interlock...............................................118
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) System....118
9-Speed Automatic Transmission............................ 118
Gear Ranges.............................................................. 119
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED .................. 120
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION....................................... 121
POWER STEERING........................................................... 121
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.......................... 121
Autostop Mode.......................................................... 121
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop.. 122
To Start The Engine While In Autostop .................... 122
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System ......... 122
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System.......... 123
System Malfunction.................................................. 123
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED ............. 123
Cruise Control ........................................................... 123
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).................................. 124
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED .................................................................... 132
ParkSense Sensors .................................................. 132
ParkSense Display.................................................... 132
ParkSense Warning Display..................................... 135
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ......................... 135
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System............ 135
Cleaning The ParkSense System............................. 136
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ................... 136
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED..................................................................... 137
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
Assist System............................................................ 137
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation................................................................... 138
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ......................................... 140
LaneSense Operation............................................... 140
Turning LaneSense On Or Off .................................. 140
LaneSense Warning Message ................................. 140
Changing LaneSense Status.................................... 142
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...........................142
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED......................................................................143
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.................................145
REFUELING THE VEHICLE................................................146
VEHICLE LOADING ...........................................................146
Certification Label .....................................................146
TRAILER TOWING .............................................................147
Common Towing Definitions.....................................147
Trailer Hitch Classification........................................149
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ........................................................149
Vehicle Loading Chart...............................................150
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................................151
Towing Requirements ..............................................151
Towing Tips ...............................................................153
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME) .....154
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle...........154
DRIVING TIPS....................................................................155
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ....................................155
Driving Through Water .............................................156
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ..................................................... 157
CYBERSECURITY ............................................................. 157
UCONNECT SETTINGS...................................................... 157
Customer Programmable Features ........................ 158
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) WITH AMAZON
FIRE TV BUILT-IN — IF EQUIPPED .................................. 177
Overview .................................................................... 177
Getting Started.......................................................... 177
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in from the Front Radio Screen ....................... 178
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in from the Rear Screens................................. 178
First Time Starting Up (Using the Rear Screens) .... 178
Alexa Voice Control ................................................... 179
Listen Via Vehicle Speakers..................................... 179
Quick Menu ...............................................................179
Parental Controls (Using the Rear Screens)............ 179
Voice Remote with Alexa Pairing (Using the Rear
Screens)..................................................................... 179
Media Sources Input (Using the Front Radio and
Rear Screens)............................................................ 180
Voice Remote with Alexa .......................................... 180
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in streaming
(Using the Front Radio and Rear Screens) .................181
Play A Blu-ray™ or DVD —If Equipped ...................... 182
Fire TV Apps/Games (Using the Rear Screens) ...... 183
Using The Video USB Port ........................................ 183
Play Video Games..................................................... 183
Headphones Operation ............................................ 183
Rear Climate Controls .............................................. 184
Legal & Compliance.................................................. 186
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.................. 186
Regulatory And Safety Information.......................... 186
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES .......................................................... 187
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................................ 187
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System .................. 188
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ...................................... 192
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped............ 192
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation —
If Equipped................................................................ 195
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ............... 197
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ............................... 200
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ................... 200
Important Safety Precautions.................................. 200
Seat Belt Systems .................................................... 201
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS).................. 209
Child Restraints ........................................................ 219
SAFETY TIPS .................................................................... 233
Transporting Passengers ......................................... 233
Transporting Pets .................................................... 233
Connected Vehicles.................................................. 233
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ............................................................... 233
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ................................................................234
Exhaust Gas...............................................................235
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .....................................235
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS......................................236
SOS AND ASSIST MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ..................236
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —IF EQUIPPED ...........239
Preparations For Jacking .........................................239
Jack And Spare Tire Location ...................................240
Equipment Removal .................................................240
Jacking Instructions ..................................................240
Road Tire Installation................................................244
Portable Air Compressor —If Equipped ....................244
Return Inflatable Spare Tire .....................................245
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED..................................245
JUMP STARTING ...............................................................251
Preparations For Jump Start.....................................251
Jump Starting Procedure ..........................................252
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED ................252
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS.........................................253
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ...............................................254
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ...........................................255
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE.......................................256
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models..................................258
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) ..258
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)......................................258
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................................ 259
Maintenance Plan..................................................... 260
ENGINE COMPARTMENT................................................. 262
3.6L Engine ............................................................... 262
Checking Oil Level..................................................... 263
Adding Washer Fluid ................................................263
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................................263
Pressure Washing ..................................................... 264
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................................................ 264
Engine Oil .................................................................. 264
Engine Oil Filter ......................................................... 265
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .......................................... 265
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection............................... 265
Air Conditioner Maintenance ................................... 266
Body Lubrication .......................................................268
Windshield Wiper Blades.......................................... 268
Exhaust System ........................................................ 270
Cooling System.......................................................... 271
Brake System ........................................................... 273
Automatic Transmission .......................................... 274
Fuses ......................................................................... 275
Bulb Replacement .................................................... 282
TIRES ................................................................................ 283
Tire Safety Information ............................................ 283
Tires — General Information .................................... 291
Tire Types................................................................... 294
Spare Tires — If Equipped ........................................ 295
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................................... 296
Snow Traction Devices ............................................ 297
Tire Rotation Recommendations ............................. 298
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE
QUALITY GRADES ........................................................... 298
Treadwear ................................................................. 298
Traction Grades ........................................................ 299
Temperature Grades ................................................ 299
STORING THE VEHICLE ................................................... 299
BODYWORK...................................................................... 300
Protection From Atmospheric Agents...................... 300
Body And Underbody Maintenance......................... 300
Preserving The Bodywork......................................... 300
INTERIORS ....................................................................... 301
Seats And Fabric Parts............................................. 301
Plastic And Coated Parts.......................................... 301
Leather Surfaces ...................................................... 302
Glass Surfaces ......................................................... 302
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)..................... 303
BRAKE SYSTEM ............................................................... 303
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .............. 303
Torque Specifications............................................... 303
FUEL REQUIREMENTS..................................................... 304
3.6L Engine............................................................... 304
Reformulated Gasoline ........................................... 304
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .................................... 304
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ............ 305
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications.................. 305
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) In Gasoline .................................................... 305
Materials Added To Fuel .......................................... 305
Fuel System Cautions............................................... 305
FLUID CAPACITIES .......................................................... 306
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .............................. 306
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............................ 307
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR
VEHICLE ............................................................................308
Prepare For The Appointment ..................................308
Prepare A List ............................................................308
Be Reasonable With Requests.................................308
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............................................308
Roadside Assistance.................................................308
FCA US LLC Customer Center...................................309
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........................309
Mexico........................................................................310
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands............................310
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired(TDD/TTY)....................................................310
Service Contract ........................................................310
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................310
MOPAR® PARTS ..............................................................311
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ......................................311
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C........311
In Canada...................................................................311
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......................................311
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS.......................312
GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................312
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Chrysler vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the
terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions,
recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should
only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information, which may or
may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped” or, if applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information. All data contained
in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves
the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Chrysler vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
1
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating
your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
Ú page 102.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING!
These statements apply to operating procedures that
could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements apply to procedures that could result in
damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation, operation,
and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of the
product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on a
particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to the
topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness
and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 102
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 103
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 103
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 103
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
Ú page 103
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 104
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 104
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 104
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 104
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 104
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 104
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 104
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 104
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 105
Red Warning Lights
Yellow Warning Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 105
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 105
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 105
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 105
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 105
LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 105
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 105
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 106
1
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light
Ú page 106
Service AWD Warning Light
Ú page 106
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian Emergency Braking
(PEB) Warning Light
Ú page 106
Service LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 106
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 106
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 106
Yellow Warning Lights
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)
OFF Indicator Light
Ú page 107
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Vehicle Detected Indicator
Light
Ú page 107
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator Light
Ú page 107
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 107
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 108
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
KeySense Indicator Light
Ú page 108
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 108
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 108
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 108
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 108
Green Indicator Lights
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
Ú page 108
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 108
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 108
Set Speed Display Indicator Light
Ú page 109
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 109
1
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ (if equipped), Remote Start (if equipped), and remote
power liftgate operation. The key fob allows you to lock or
unlock the doors and liftgate, optional power liftgate, left
power sliding door, and right power sliding door, from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). When any
button on the key fob is pushed, or when any signal is being
transferred between the key fob and the vehicle, an LED
light on the key fob will flash as an indicator. The key fob
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system. The key fob also contains an emergency key, which
is stored in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob become depleted.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the glove
compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you
when valet parking.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the key
fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other
electronic device. This may result in poor performance.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless Charging
Pad, the key fob may not be detected if it is placed
within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad
Ú page 77.
With the ignition in the ON position and the vehicle
moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are
disabled.
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted
battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to
the instrument cluster, which will display directions to
follow.
NOTE:
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by a
message in the instrument cluster display, or by the
LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no
longer illuminates from key fob button pushes, then
the key fob battery requires replacement.
The key fob LED light brightness is designed for indoor
light viewing, so the LED light may not be visible in
direct sunlight
Ú page 312.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s front door and sliding door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and the liftgate.
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and the liftgate.
1 — LED Light
2 — Unlock
3 — Liftgate
4 — Left Power Sliding Side Door
5 — Emergency Key
6 — Lock
7 — Remote Start
8 — Right Power Sliding Side Door
9 — Panic Alarm
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
and the illuminated entry system will be activated. When
the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash and the
horn will chirp. Settings in the Uconnect system can
change to lights only, chirp only, or both.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive
Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors can be locked. The doors will unlock again only if the
key fob is inside the passenger compartment.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push
of the unlock button within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 157.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and visual
alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along with
a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in order for
the vehicle to check for the presence of a key fob; the
Key Left Vehicle feature will not activate until all of the
doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations where
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery
dimensions.
Batteries contain harmful chemicals. Dispose old
batteries by placing them in correct containers
according to the law or by taking them to a dealership,
where they will be handled appropriately.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the
mechanical release button on the side of the key fob
with your thumb and then pulling the key out with
your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Insert a coin or a flat-blade screwdriver into the now
exposed slot and carefully pry on both sides to
disengage the snaps. Gently remove the back cover
from the fob, being careful not to damage any of the
snaps.
3. Remove the battery by sliding the battery rearward in
its pocket until the battery lifts up. Remove the
depleted battery from the battery pocket and dispose
appropriately.
4. Fit a new battery ensuring that the positive (+) side is
facing upwards. Push the battery into the pocket until
it is firmly seated in place and secured under both
tabs.
5. Align the back cover into its original position and snap
it back in place by pushing it against the fob until it is
seated all around.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle elec-
tronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match
the vehicle locks.
KeySense Features — If Equipped
This feature provides the vehicle owner with the ability to
customize vehicle settings that can be applied to
determine the driving experience for other drivers of the
vehicle. The vehicle settings are protected by a unique
4-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when
accessing the specific settings for the first time.
KeySense also has additional features that are always
enabled when the specific key fob is in use that cannot be
set by the vehicle owner. While this specific key fob is in
use, the vehicle will respond accordingly to the customized
vehicle settings and mandatory features. This includes
enhanced driving assistance features, increased driver
alerts, and the locking of certain optional features. These
settings can be selected within the Uconnect system
Ú page 157.
KeySense Key Fob
KeySense Unique Splash Screen
At vehicle start-up, the KeySense splash screen should
inform the driver that the vehicle will be functioning in
KeySense mode when the KeySense key fob is in use.
Start Up Display Features
Unique splash screen graphic
Telltale illuminated
After unique splash screen, and after stored messages
are cycled, then start-up KeySense messages (Range &
Max Speed) are displayed
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from children. If
the battery compartment does not close securely,
stop using the product and keep it away from chil-
dren.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Igni-
tion, always remember to place the ignition in the
OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
The following features are always enabled when this key
fob is in use:
Entertainment audio muted if front occupied seat belts
are not fastened
Consistent seat belt unfastened chime
Maximum radio volume limited to 15 out of 39
Daytime Running Lights
Headlights On With Wipers
Rain Sensing Wipers
Automatic High Beams
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used
to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle
electronics, the engine will start and shut off after two
seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
by an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 312.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During START, RUN
will illuminate.
START/STOP Ignition Button
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.)
are still available
ACC
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices are available (e.g. power
windows)
ON/RUN
Driving position
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the brake pedal)
The engine only runs with the ignition in the ON/RUN
ignition position, or from a Remote Start request.
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or depleted
battery. In this situation, a backup method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side
opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to operate the
ignition switch.
Backup Starting Method
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices
may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system from starting the vehicle.
For the proper engine starting procedure, see
Ú page 111.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range
of 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather
and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient
conditions before the customer enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce
this range
Ú page 312.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute
cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down after 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on, and remain on, during
Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof (if
equipped) operation are disabled when the vehicle is in
the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for
a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
Vehicle Security Light flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button on the
key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security system (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off with
another push and release of the Remote Start button on
the key fob, or if the engine is allowed to run for the entire
15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position, the climate controls will resume previously
set operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will show in the instrument
cluster display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less.
The time is dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
the timer expires, the system will automatically adjust the
settings depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next section
for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost
will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat feature will turn on
if selected in the Comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Settings
Ú page 157. In warm weather, the driver vented
seat feature will automatically turn on when Remote Start
is activated, if programmed in the Comfort menu screen.
The vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will be automatically adjusted to the
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on the
outside ambient temperature. This will occur until the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
climate settings will default to maximum heat, with
fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost timer
expires, the vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F
(26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last
settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or above, the
climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode,
with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
Ú page 60.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position. The climate control settings will change, and
exit automatic operation, if manually adjusted by the
driver while the vehicle is in Remote Start mode. This
includes the OFF button on the climate controls, which
will turn the system off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When the Remote Start system is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote
Start will resume its previous operation. If the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or
exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Canceled — Too Cold
Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors for
unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and
power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security system
provides both audible and visible signals. If something
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security system will provide
the following audible and visible signals: the horn will
pulse, the parking lights and/or turn signals will flash, and
the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will
flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition
system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
door handle with a valid key fob available in the
same exterior zone
Ú page 21.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if equipped)
Ú page 21.
Hands-Free Liftgate Passive Entry activation (if
equipped).
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry, push the START/STOP ignition
button (requires at least one valid key fob in the
vehicle).
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security
system.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not
disarm the Vehicle Security system. If someone enters
the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
Security system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the horn off
after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds between cycles
and up to 8 cycles if the trigger remains active) and then
rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
To lock each door, rotate the door lock on each door trim
panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside
door handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock
button until the ribbing is visible. To unlock the rear doors,
rotate the door lock button until the red indicator is visible.
Manual Front Door Lock
Manual Rear Door Lock
If the door lock is in the locked position (no ribbing is
visible) when you shut the door, the door will lock.
Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle
before closing the door.
NOTE:
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the liftgate.
1 — Door Handle
2 — Manual Door Lock
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel.
Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door is open,
the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking your key fob in the vehicle. Placing the
ignition in the OFF position or closing the door will allow
the locks to operate. A chime will sound if the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position and a door is open, as a
reminder to place the ignition in the OFF position and
remove the key fob.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system. This feature
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through the
Uconnect system Ú page 157.
The key fob may not be detected by the Passive Entry
system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or
other electronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry
handle from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
If set by the customer in the Uconnect Settings,
unlocking with Passive Entry will initiate illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate light, parking
lights) for the time 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive
Entry also initiates two flashes of the turn signals.
If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting
in a slower response time.
The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles, if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and
will arm the Vehicle Security system (if equipped).
The sliding side doors can be unlocked from the
outside using the hands-free or Passive Entry system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side:
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle,
grab the handle to unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the
driver’s door handle will unlock the driver’s side doors
(driver/sliding door) automatically. Grabbing the front
passenger door handle will unlock all four doors and the
liftgate automatically. The interior door panel lock knob
will rotate when the door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock when
you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
Ú page 157.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a key
fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is
equipped with an automatic door unlock feature.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid key fob while a door
is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a key fob inside the car, and it does not detect any
key fob outside the car, then the car will unlock and alert
the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive
Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no valid
key fob is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not
unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are
met:
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then the doors are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry
door handle.
NOTE:
On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the key fob
can be locked in the vehicle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver or passenger front door handle, push the door
handle lock button to lock all four doors and the liftgate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle lock button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the
doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is
done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
Settings, the key fob protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release handle. With a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate release handle for a power open on
vehicles equipped with Power Liftgate. Pull the electronic
liftgate handle and lift for manual liftgate vehicles
Ú page 312.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks all
of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This will occur
only after the gear selector has been placed into the PARK
position, after the vehicle has been driven (the gear selector
has been placed out of PARK and all doors closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
operate if there is any manual operation of the door locks
(lock or unlock).
This feature can be turned on or off in the Uconnect
system
Ú page 157.
MANUAL SLIDING SIDE DOOR
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the
sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle backwards
opens the door and rocking forward releases the hold
open latch in order to close the door.
NOTE:
If equipped with power sliding doors, using the manual
door handle will activate the power opening/closing
function. Allow the door to open or close fully on its own,
without forcing it.
Side Door Handle And Lock Functions
To keep your door operating properly, observe the
following guidelines:
Always open the door smoothly.
Avoid high impacts against the door stop when opening
the door. This is very important when your vehicle is
parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in the
downhill direction.
There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
exterior handle.
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE:
The left side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel
door is open. If attempted, a message will appear in the
instrument cluster display, and the door will automatically
return to the closed position.
1 — Door Handle
2 — Door Lock
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SLIDING SIDE DOOR —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power sliding door may be power opened or closed in
several ways:
Key fob
Inside or outside handles
Buttons located:
In the overhead console
Just inside the sliding door
On the outside handle
Push the button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open, close, or reverse a power
sliding door.
The key fob and the overhead console button will operate
the door when the door is locked. All other ways require
the sliding door to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped
with Passive Entry, pushing the button on the outside
handle or Hands-Free feature (if equipped) will unlock and
open the sliding door, with a valid Passive Entry key fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.
Overhead Console Power Switches
There is a power sliding side door switch located on the
B-pillar trim panel on the driver’s and passenger’s side,
just in front of the power sliding door for the rear seat
passengers.
To operate the sliding door manually with the handles or
to avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors
from the rear seats, push the power sliding door power off
button, located in the overhead console, to remove power
to the handles and buttons just inside the sliding doors.
The power off LED, in the overhead console, will be lit
when the handles are manual. When the LED is lit,
pushing the power sliding door power off button will return
the handles to power operation.
NOTE:
If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while
it is closing or opening, the door will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position and an audible
tone will sound, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
The turn signals will flash with sliding door movements.
If the power sliding door stops in the middle due to
obstacles, it will power open on the next command.
Power Sliding Side Door Switch (Left Side Shown)
1 — Liftgate
2 — Left Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Right Sliding Door
WARNING!
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if caught
in the path of the sliding door. Make sure the door
path is clear before closing the door.
Before driving off, check the instrument cluster for a
sliding door or door open message or warning indi-
cator. Failure to do this could result in unintentionally
leaving the sliding door open while driving.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
HANDS-FREE SLIDING DOORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors, use a straight in
and out kicking motion, move your foot from side to side,
or in a sweeping motion, under the vehicle in the general
location below the door handle(s).
Activation Zone
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the sliding door
will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the sliding door
will open almost instantaneously. This assumes all
options are enabled in the Uconnect Settings.
NOTE:
To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors requires a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door
handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft
(1.5 m), the door will not respond to any kicks.
The Hands-Free Sliding Doors will only operate when
the gear selector is in PARK.
With every movement of the Hands-Free Sliding Doors,
an audible tone will sound and the turn signals will
flash. You can turn these alerts on or off in the
Uconnect system
Ú page 157.
If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while
it is closing or opening, the door will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position and an audible
tone will sound, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
The turn signals will flash with sliding door movements.
If the power sliding doors encounter multiple obstruc-
tions within the same cycle, the system will automati-
cally stop.
The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature may be turned off
through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 157.
NOTE:
The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature should be turned off
during jacking, tire changing, and vehicle service.
CHILD PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a Child
Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the Child
Protection Door Lock control inward (toward the
vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door Lock.
Child Protection Door Locks
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
NOTE:
After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, always
test the inside door handle with the sliding door closed
to make certain the Child Protection Door Lock is in the
locked position.
After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock,
always test the inside door handle with the sliding door
closed to make certain the Child Protection Door Lock
is in the unlocked position.
The inside door handle will not open the sliding door
when the Child Protection Door Lock is engaged.
The power sliding door will operate from the switch
located just inside the sliding door, regardless of the
Child Protection Door Lock lever position.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
door from the rear seats, push the Sliding Door Power
Off button, located in the overhead console. When the
overhead console power OFF LED is illuminated, the
sliding door may not be power opened or closed by
pushing the buttons just inside the sliding doors or
pulling on the handles.
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward
(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child
Protection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
NOTE:
After disengaging (or engaging) the Child Protection Door
Lock, always test the inside door handle with the sliding
door closed to make certain the Child Protection Door
Lock is in the desired position. The inside door handle will
open the sliding door when the Child Protection Door Lock
is disengaged.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located left
of the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an average of
80 minutes before automatically shutting off. This time
will vary based on environmental temperatures. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located within the
Uconnect system. You can access the button through the
Comfort screen.
Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a second time
to turn the heating element off.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors cannot be opened
from the inside door handle when the Child Protection
Door Locks are engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel
to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 18.
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile saves desired position settings for
the following features:
Driver’s seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (if equipped)
Power steering wheel position (if equipped)
Side mirrors (if equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can be
linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
Memory settings will be linked to the driver profiles in
the Uconnect system, in addition to several other
features (radio presets, home screens, settings, navi-
gation, phone, etc.)
Ú page 157.
The Driver Memory Settings switch is located on the driver
door, next to the door handle, and consists of three
buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two saved memory profiles.
Driver Memory Switch
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected profile
from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors and
radio station presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch, and
then push the desired memory button (1 or 2) within
five seconds. The instrument cluster display will show
which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB
T
O MEMORY
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of two
saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must select the
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature through the
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 157.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
1 — Memory Profile Button 1
2 — Memory Profile Button 2
3 — Set Button
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
the set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory settings
by pushing the set (S) button, and then, within 10
seconds, pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
The vehicle speed must be less than or equal to 5 mph
(8 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall is
attempted when the vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), a message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Memory settings can be linked to driver profiles in the
Uconnect system. Changing driver profiles will also
recall the linked memory settings if the conditions are
met
Ú page 157.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two, push
the desired memory button (1 or 2) on the driver's door or
the unlock button on the key fob linked to the desired
memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons on the driver's door during a recall (S, 1, or 2).
When a recall is canceled, the driver's seat stops moving.
A delay of one second will occur before another recall can
be selected.
NOTE:
Pushing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the memory
mirror recall.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of the
vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Manual Front Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pump the
lever upward to raise the seat height or pump the lever
downward to lower the seat height.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
For models equipped with manual seats, the recline lever
is located on the outboard side of the seat.
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever and push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Height Adjustment
3 — Recline Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat
belt.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Manual Forward/Rearward Adjustment —
Quad Seats (If Equipped)
Both second row seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is located
under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Manual Rear Seat Adjuster
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Recline — Quad Seats
Recline Lever
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, and push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
Second Row Removable 8th Seat —
If Equipped
While the 8th seat does not stow in the floor, it is foldable
and removable for added cargo space.
Second Row 8th Seat Fold Flat Strap
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
The release strap is located on the front of the seat, near
the floor. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to
release the rear latches. The seat assembly can now be
removed from the vehicle by moving it in a rearward
direction from the detent positions in the floor.
Release Strap
NOTE:
The seat can be removed easier with one outboard seat
stowed in the load floor.
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent
positions on the floor. Tilt seat rearward to lock the
seatback into its original position.
In Floor Detent Guides
Fold-Flat Quad Seats And Stow ‘n Go Seats
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles, or wrinkling of the seat
fabric if the seats are left folded for an extended period
of time. This is normal and by simply unfolding the
seats to the open position, over time the seat cushion
may return to its normal shape. Having an occupant sit
in the seat, or massaging the fabric by hand may
smooth away any excess wrinkling.
Permanent wrinkles may still result.
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward
position and push the seatback forward until it rests on
the seat cushion.
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever
NOTE:
The seatback may lock into the fold-flat position. Use
the recline lever to unlock the seatback.
If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating: when returning the
seat to the original position, the headrest must be
folded back to the original position.
Stow ‘n Go Seating Head Restraint
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become loose.
Personal injuries could result.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Easy Entry
Easy Tilt Seat — With Or Without Child Seat Installed
The second row seats can be tilted forward for easy entry
into the third row with or without a child seat installed.
1. Located in the seatback of the second row seat is a
lever (or handle for Stow ‘n Go seats) that provides
easier access to the third row by tilting the seat
forward.
2. Slide the lever upwards, or if equipped, pull the
handle forward, to unlock the seatback.
Lift Easy Tilt Seat Lever (If Equipped)
Pull Easy Tilt Seat Handle (If Equipped)
3. Push on seatback to slide seat forward to access the
third row.
Easy Tilt Seat
Easy Tilt With Child Seat Installed
4. To put the seat back into original position, just pull
back on the seatback and lock the seat into position.
WARNING!
Do not use this feature with a child in seat. Serious
injury or death may occur.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Easy Entry — With The Seat Folded Flat
The seats can be folded and tilted for more accessibility
for passengers to enter and exit the third row.
1. Without a child seat installed, you can fold the seat
by pulling the recliner handle on the bottom part of
the seat. Before pulling the recliner lever, make sure
the arm rests are folded up.
Recliner Lever
2. To put it back into position, pull back on the folded
seat and make sure that it locks into position. Then,
pull the seatback toward the back and fold down the
arm rests.
Exit For Third Row Passengers — Stow ‘n Go Seats Only
If the second row is equipped with Stow ‘n Go, third row
passengers can pull on the strap and push the seat
forward for folding the seatback down and tilting the seat
to the floor for an easy exit.
Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers
NOTE:
This process is for when there is no child seat installed.
Use the easy entry lever if a child seat is installed.
Second Row Removable Quad Seat
The second row quad seats, not equipped with the Stow ‘n
Go feature, are removable for added cargo space.
Removing Seat
1. Adjust seat to the full rearward position.
2. Lift the recline lever to fold the seatback flat against
the seat cushion.
Lift Recline Lever And Fold Seatback Flat
NOTE:
Push downward on the seatback to make sure it is in the
locked position.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. The release strap is located on the front of the seat,
near the floor.
Seat Release Strap
4. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to release
the rear latches.
5. Tilt the back of the seat to the upward position.
Tilt Seat Forward
6. The seat assembly can now be removed from the
vehicle. Grab the front seatback edge located near
the head restraint and the grab the bar on the rear
side of the seat cushion for easy removal.
Seat Removal
Reinstalling Seat
1. To reinstall the seat: With the seat tilted forward,
align the seat’s front attachments into the detent
positions on the floor.
In Floor Seat Detents
Installing Seat
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back into its original
position.
NOTE:
Push downward to ensure the rear latches are in the
locked position.
3. Lift the recline handle and return the seat back to the
seating position.
Manually Folding Third Row Seats —
If Equipped
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles, or wrinkling of the seat
fabric if the seats are left folded for an extended period
of time. This is normal and by simply unfolding the
seats to the open position, over time the seat cushion
may return to its normal shape. Having an occupant sit
in the seat, or massaging the fabric by hand may
smooth away any excess wrinkling.
Permanent wrinkles may still result.
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the
seatback by pushing the button on the guide and
pushing the head restraint down.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the anchors.
Release Strap “1”
3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
Strap “2”
Stowed Third Row Seat
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the
anchors latch.
Assist Straps
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become loose.
Personal injuries could result.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
Strap “2”
3. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
Stow 'n Go Seating
On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go seating, the second
and third row seats can be folded into the floor for
convenient storage.
AUTO ADVANCE ‘N RETURN — IF EQUIPPED
On vehicles equipped with the Auto Advance ‘n Return
feature, the front seat will move forward automatically to
a location that will allow the second row Stow ‘n Go seat
movement, without interference by the front seat. After
the second row seat is stowed, the front seat will move
back to the previous location once the Auto Advance ‘n
Return button is pushed again.
The Auto Advance ‘n Return feature is available to both the
front driver and passenger power seats (if equipped).
A one-touch Auto Advance ‘n Return button is located on
the B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding
door.
Auto Advance ‘n Return Button (Left Side Shown)
Using the Auto Advance ‘n Return Feature
NOTE:
The button is only functional when the power sliding
door is open and the vehicle is in PARK. If the door is
not open or the vehicle is not in PARK when the button
is pushed, the front seat will not move and a message
will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
If the power sliding door is closing when the button is
pushed, the front seat will not move and a message will
be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
The Auto Advance ‘n Return feature will not function if
the front doors are open.
1. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n Return
button.
2. Perform the second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement
Ú page 37.
3. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n Return button
a second time. The front seat cushion and seatback
will return to the original starting location.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the head restraints are in
their upright positions when the seat is to be occu-
pied.
WARNING!
During power seat operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the front seat is not
occupied and the seat travel path is clear when
operating the power seat.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE:
To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, push
the Auto Advance ‘n Return button, or push the front
power seat button to stop the seat movement. Pushing
the Auto Advance ‘n Return button again will return the
front seat to the original starting location.
The Auto Advance ‘n Return system includes obstacle
detection. When the system detects an obstacle, the
seat will stop, reverse direction, and return to the
previous location. A message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster indicating that an obstacle has been
detected.
If the front seat is already in a location that will allow
space for Stow ‘n Go of the second row seat, the front
seat will not move and a message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
If calibration of the front seat is lost, the seat will auto-
matically recalibrate when the Auto Advance ‘n Return
button is pushed. This may result in the seat cushion
moving forward and downward, before moving to the
location that will allow space for the second row Stow
‘n Go seat movement.
SECOND ROW STOW 'N GO
For Manual Seats: To stow the seat in the floor, move the
front seat all the way forward using the manual seat
adjustment bar. Move the seatback all the way forward
using the recliner handle located on the outboard side of
the cushion. Move the seat height to at least mid position
using the height adjuster handle in the outboard side of
the cushion.
For Power Seats: Push the Auto Advance ‘n Return button
located on the B-pillar trim (if equipped)
Ú page 36.
1. To access the storage area, remove the floor mat
(if equipped) and place the lock rod in the locked
position.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the unlocked position.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the locked
position.
For information on storage bin function with the
seats rearward
Ú page 72.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to
open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front
seats while folding the top half down, and rest it
against the front seats.
Push Panel Forward
4. Remove the plastic storage bin (if equipped) from the
storage area, and store in a safe location.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Fold the armrest upward and stow the seat by
grabbing the strap on the lower part of the seatback,
and guide the seat into the storage area.
Pull Strap
6. Push down on the seatback to lock the seat into the
storage area.
Push To Lock
7. Close the floor by pulling the floor panel backwards by
the bottom corner edge of the panel.
Extend Floor Panel
8. Push down on floor panel to lock into place.
Push To Lock
9. Readjust the front seat as needed, and replace the
floor mat (if equipped).
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched:
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be latched and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat
tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover.
Do not sit on the second row seat when it is in the
stowed position with the seatback upright otherwise
damage to the seat may occur.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
TO UNSTOW SECOND ROW SEATS
For Manual Seats: To unstow the seat from the floor, move
the front seat all the way forward using the manual seat
adjustment bar.
For Power Seats: Push the Auto Advance ‘n Return button
located on the B-pillar trim (if equipped)
Ú page 36.
1. To access the storage area, remove the floor mat
(if equipped) and place the lock rod in the unlocked
position.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the unlocked position.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the locked posi-
tion.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to
open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front
seats while folding the top half down and rest it
against the front seats.
Push Panel Forward
4. Pull the strap located on the seat and pull the seat
out of the storage area. Push the seat rearward
making sure that it locks into the floor. Fold the
seatback into the upright position and pull the
headrest up.
NOTE:
The seatback may be locked, if it is, it will be necessary to
use the recliner handle to unlock the back before folding
into the upright position.
Pull Strap
5. Replace the plastic storage bin into the storage area.
6. To position the floor panel back into its original state,
grab the bottom corner and extend it outward.
Extend Panel
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Lay the floor panel flat and push down until it clicks
into position.
Push Down To Lock
8. Readjust the front seat as needed, and replace the
floor mat (if equipped).
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switches control the movement of the seat cushion and
the seatback.
Driver Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward by
using the seat switch. The seat will move in the direction
of the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the head restraints are in
their upright positions when the seat is to be occu-
pied.
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
3 — Lumbar Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat
belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Power Lumbar Switch Location
The front driver’s seat may be equipped with a four way
lumbar adjustment. The power lumbar switch is located on
the outboard side of the equipped power seat. Push the
switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the
lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to
raise or lower the lumbar support.
The front passenger’s seat may be equipped with either a
two way or a four way lumbar adjustment. Push the switch
forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar
support, and if equipped, push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you
have the driver seat positioned when you place the
vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
When the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the
driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (6.8 cm) rear-
ward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal
to 2.7 inches (6 cm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
will return to its previously set position when the igni-
tion is cycled out of the OFF position.
When the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the
driver seat will move to a position 0.3 inches (0.7 cm)
forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is
between 0.9 – 2.7 inches (2.3 – 6.8 cm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set posi-
tion when the ignition is cycled out of the OFF position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches (2.3 cm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
When enabled within Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and
Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory setting
profile (if equipped)
Ú page 27.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled within
the Uconnect system Ú page 157.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat
belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
The power recline feature, located on the trim panel next
to the seat, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward
for occupant comfort.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push and hold the forward or rearward button,
the seat will move in the direction of the button push.
Release the button when the desired position is reached.
Third Row Power Seat Switch
NOTE:
The third row power recline buttons can be locked out
using the Third Row Lockout setting within the Uconnect
system
Ú page 157.
Third Row Power Stow ‘n Go Seat —
If Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
right rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
NOTE:
The third row outboard seat belts may interfere with the
power folding of the seat. Place the seat belt webbing
behind the stow clip before stowing or opening the seat.
When the seat is in the desired position, remove the
webbing from the stow clip so that it is ready for use. Never
leave the seat belt in the stow clip when it is used to
restrain an occupant.
NOTE:
The outer head restraints will lower automatically as
necessary when the power seat begins to move.
The center head restraint raises and lowers manually
but will not lower automatically.
The head restraint can also be lowered manually using
the pull strap located at the back of the seat
Ú page 46.
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open and
the vehicle is in PARK.
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat
belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the third
row stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an
occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned prop-
erly on the occupant and they could be more seri-
ously injured in an accident as a result.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually or
together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to the
following positions using the switch bank located on the
left rear trim panel:
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
To move the selected seat(s) to the normal (seated)
position, push and release the “Normal” button. The seat
will automatically stop when the Normal position is
reached.
To move the selected seat(s) to the stow position, push
and release the “Stow” button. The seat will automatically
stop when the Stow position is reached.
To move the selected seat(s) back in the forward or
reverse direction, push and hold the “Fold Forward/Back”
button. Release the button when the desired position is
reached.
1. Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the
mini-buckle before attempting to fold/stow the
power third row seats.
2. Before pushing the “Normal” or “Stow” button, place
the outboard seat belt webbing behind the stow clips,
located on the rear trim panel. When the seat reaches
the desired position, remove the webbing from the
clip so it is ready for use to restrain an occupant.
Seat Belt Stowage Clip
3. To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, push
a different seat position selector switch to stop the
seat. Once the seat stops moving, then the desired
position can be selected.
4. The third row power seat system includes obstacle
detection. When the system detects an obstacle, the
motors will stop and reverse direction. Should this
occur, remove the obstacle before pushing the button
again.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles, or wrinkling of the seat
fabric if the seats are left folded for an extended period
of time. This is normal and by simply unfolding the
seats to the open position, over time the seat cushion
may return to its normal shape. Having an occupant sit
in the seat, or massaging the fabric by hand may
smooth away any excess wrinkling.
Permanent wrinkles may still result.
HEATED SEATS
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located in the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings.
The indicator lights in each switch indicate the
level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HI, one for LO and none for off.
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting
on.
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the
LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
1 — Open To Normal
2 — Stow
3 — Fold Forward/Rearward
4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 18.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the second row seats are equipped with
heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the
second row passengers to operate the seats
independently. The heated seat switches are located on
the sliding side door handle trim panels.
Second Row Heated Seat Switch (Left Side Shown)
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO
and none for off.
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating. Push the
switch a second time to select LO-level heating. Push the
switch a third time to shut the heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two
to five minutes.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the first row seat cushions are small
fans that draw the air from the passenger
compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the
driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds: HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located in
the touchscreen.
Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the
ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 18.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
PLASTIC GROCERY BAG RETAINER HOOKS
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles
are built into the seatbacks of the second row rear seats,
and if equipped, the backs of the front row seats. The floor
supports the partial weight of the bagged goods.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
four-way head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward. The front head restraints are also adjustable
forward and rearward. To tilt forward, pull the top of the
head restraint toward the front of the vehicle to the
desired position. To adjust the head restraint rearward,
continue pulling forward on the top of the head restraint to
the farthest forward position and the head restraint will
return to the upright position.
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go.
Then, push the release button and the adjustment button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint
up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to fully
remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head restraint,
put the head restraint posts into the holes and push
downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the appro-
priate height.
Front Head Restraint
Normal Position
Forward Adjustment
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad
Seats
The second row outboard head restraints, as well as the
removable 8th passenger seat (if equipped), may have
adjustable head restraints.
NOTE:
If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating, the head restraints
are non-adjustable and non-removable.
Do not pull on
non-adjustable head restraints when folding the seat.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go.
Then, push the release button and the adjustment button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint
up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to fully
remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head restraint,
put the head restraint posts into the holes and push
downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Head Restraints — Third Row
The outboard head restraints can be manually folded
forward for improved rearward visibility. Pull the release
strap to fold them forward.
Release Straps
NOTE:
The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the third row.
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
The head restraint in the center position can be raised and
lowered for tether routing or height adjustment
Ú page 200.
NOTE:
To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then,
using the adjustment button, adjust the head restraint to
the appropriate height.
Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions prior to operating the vehicle
or occupying a seat.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
POWER FOLDING THIRD ROW HEAD
RESTRAINTS — IF EQUIPPED
For improved visibility, the third row outboard head
restraints can be folded using the Uconnect system.
Press Vehicle, then Controls located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
Press the Head Restraint Fold button to power
fold the third row head restraints.
NOTE:
The head restraints can be folded downward using the
Head Restraint button or using the manual release
strap. The head restraints must be raised manually
when occupying the third row.
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION —
IF EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep,
say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the VR
button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice
Command. You can also say the vehicle “Wake Up”
word and state your command.
NOTE:
The factory default Wake Up word is set to “Hey Uconnect”
and can be reprogrammed through the Uconnect Settings.
After the beep, say:
A passenger can press the VR button shortcut on the
radio status bar to also issue a command.
You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice Command
or saying the vehicle’s “Wake Up” word and saying a
command from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — For Vehicles Equipped With Navigation: Push
The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Media,
Navigation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call, And
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For Vehicles Not Equipped With Navigation: Push The
Phone Button To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
Ú page 312.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
(US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is used to allow the driver to adjust
up, down and left, right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right.
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s view.
You can turn the feature on or off through the Uconnect
system Ú page 157.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the
visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of the
adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN SIGNAL —
I
F EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
lighting contain LEDs, which are located in the upper outer
corner of each mirror.
The LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with the
corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the
vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also
activate these LEDs.
DRIVER'S OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC
D
IMMING MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
CONVERSATION MIRROR
Located in the overhead console there is a conversation
mirror to view all the passengers in the vehicle. Push the
panel to release the drop down mirror. Raise the mirror
and push to latch it back in the stowed position.
Conversation Mirror
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror that
you want to adjust.
NOTE:
A light in the selected button will illuminate indicating the
mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Left and Right side power mirror positions can be saved as
part of the driver memory profile (if equipped)
Ú page 27.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
1 — Left Mirror Select
2 — Mirror Control Switch
3 — Right Mirror Select
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing
the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the
normal driving position.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the
folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed
is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they will
automatically unfold.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding
The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded
(by hand or by pushing the power folding mirror switch)
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds
To reset the power folding mirrors: fold and unfold them by
pushing the button (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
AUTOMATIC POWER FOLDING MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When enabled within Uconnect Settings Ú page 157, the
exterior mirrors will automatically fold when the vehicle’s
ignition is placed in the OFF position, and after the doors
are locked and closed.
The exterior mirrors will auto-fold in the following
situations after the ignition is placed in the OFF position:
Pushing the lock button on the door panel before the
door is opened.
NOTE:
If the doors are already locked, push the lock button again.
Opening the door, then pushing the lock button on the
door panel, followed by closing the door.
After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then push the
lock button on the key fob.
After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then touch the
lock icon on the Passive Entry door handle.
If the exterior mirrors were folded automatically, they will
unfold when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
If the mirrors were folded manually, by using the power
folding mirror switch on the driver’s door panel, they will
not automatically unfold.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS FOLDING FEATURE
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
two detent positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped)
Ú page 60.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE —
I
F EQUIPPED
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The driver's outside
mirror will move slightly downward from the present
position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The
driver's outside mirror will then return to the original
position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE
position. Each stored memory setting will have an
associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be enabled or
disabled through the Uconnect system
Ú page 157.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting,
or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your
vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the over-
head console or sun visor designate the three different
HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with each
press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security system
is active Ú page 312.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended that a
new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are trying to
program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of your
HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your HomeLink®
buttons, you must determine whether the device has a
rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device with
a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the device. The
button may not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary slightly
by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN” or
“TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate your
garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage door
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code final
steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code final
step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener
motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the steps from the beginning.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as
programming to a garage door opener
Ú page 52. Be sure
to determine if the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling
code before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. The procedure may need to
be performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the new
device you want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3.
Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2 in
“Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, place
the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure while
programming HomeLink® with the engine on that your
vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the garage door
remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you
wish to program while keeping the HomeLink®
indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transmitter. Do
not program the transmitter if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and
can cause you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pushed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Canadian/
Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all channels
will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for a rolling code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column. The multifunction lever controls the turn
signals, headlight high/low beams, and flash-to-pass
functions.
Multifunction Lever
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transceiver. Do
not program the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
WARNING!
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, interior
lights, and the fog lights.
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
switch is placed in the parking lights position. However,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise to the first detent for parking light and
instrument panel light operation. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light
and instrument panel operation.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking light and instrument panel
light position to the first detent to turn on the headlights
also. Rotate to the second detent, AUTO position, to turn
on automatic headlights, parking lights, and instrument
panel lights.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle will
illuminate when the engine is started. This provides a
constant lights on condition until the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. If the parking brake is applied, the
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front fog
lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was
purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be turned
on or off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 157.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or
on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning
lights are activated).
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the
multifunction lever back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam system provides increased
forward lighting at night by automatically controlling the
high beams through the use of a camera mounted on the
windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific light and
automatically switches from high beams to low beams
until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of
vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain
on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film and other
obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause
the system to function improperly.
To Activate
1. Select “Auto Dim High Beams” through the
Uconnect system to enable the feature
Ú
page 157.
2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the AUTO
position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to
“Multifunction Lever” in this section for further
information.
NOTE:
This system will not activate until the vehicle is at, or
above 16 mph (25 km/h).
To Deactivate
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
Automatic High Beam system.
1. Deselect “Auto Dim High Beams” through the
Uconnect system
Ú
page 157.
2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights from the high beam to the low beam
position.
3. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise from
the AUTO to the on position.
NOTE:
Once active, the Automatic High Beam system will stop
functioning below 12 mph (20 km/h).
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will
cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on,
until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
the headlight switch to the extreme clockwise position
aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the headlight
switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Time Delay
feature is also on. This means your headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. To turn the automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the Automatic mode.
HEADLIGHTS ON WITH WIPERS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the
engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn on
when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights on
when windshield wipers are on may be found on vehicles
equipped with an automatic headlight system.
NOTE:
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off
through the Uconnect system
Ú page 157.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. The 90 second
delay interval begins when headlight switch is turned off.
If the headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the
ignition is placed in the ON position, the delay will be
cancelled.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have the
headlights remain on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds or not
remain on. You can change the timer setting through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 157.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The headlights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position, the vehicle will chime
when the driver's door is opened.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or
the low beam headlights and push the headlight switch
control knob. Pushing the headlight switch control knob a
second time will turn the front fog lights off.
Fog Light Switch
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on,
a chime will sound and a message will display in the
cluster to alert the driver.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior lights to
protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is in the OFF position, and
any door is left open or the dimmer control is rotated all
the way up to the dome light on position, the interior lights
will automatically turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is placed in
the ON position.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is placed in
the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically turn
off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and
left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the
exterior lights will automatically turn off.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy light switches are used to turn the courtesy
lights on/off.
Courtesy Light Switches
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the driver or
passenger light switch.
NOTE:
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the interior
lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery from
discharging once the doors are closed.
If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned off
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights —
If Equipped
Located above the rear passengers are courtesy/reading
lights. The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door
or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on
when the unlock button on the key fob is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push
the lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle.
Push the lens a second time to turn each light off.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch, and
are located on the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the right
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the
instrument cluster lights. Rotating the left dimmer control
will adjust the interior light levels of the ambient lighting
on the instrument panel and doors.
Dimmer Controls
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
At the top detent of the instrument panel dimmer, all the
interior lights will illuminate. At the bottom most setting
(extreme bottom) interior lights are turned off (dome off),
and the cluster, radio and instrument lighting go to their
lowest dimmable setting.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the
lever.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
the wiper lever. Rotate the switch at the end of the lever
upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings
for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the switch at the
end of the lever upward to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation. To
turn the windshield wipers off, rotate the switch within the
lever all the way down to OFF.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Intermittent Wipers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make
a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles
desirable. Rotate the switch at the end of the wiper lever
to the first detent position, and then turn the switch at the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to
a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles.
The delay intervals will double in duration when the
vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you and
hold. If the lever is pulled while on the intermittent setting,
the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is
pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers
will operate several cycles, then turn off.
1 — Pull For Front Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the parked
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the parked position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield washer use.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release for
a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to spray
the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
Ú page 268.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of the
windshield wiper lever to one of the four detent positions
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
windshield wiper lever. Wiper sensitivity position 1 is the
least sensitive, and wiper sensitivity position 4 is the most
sensitive.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the wind-
shield.
Use of products containing wax or silicone may reduce
rain sensor performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on or off
through the Uconnect system
Ú page 157.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first placed
in the ON position, when the vehicle is stationary and
the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless
the wiper control on the windshield wiper lever is
moved, the vehicle speed becomes greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h) or the outside temperature rises above
freezing.
Neutral Wipe Inhibit
— The Rain Sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is ON, when the trans-
mission gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position and
the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless
the wiper control on the windshield wiper lever is
moved, the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h) or the gear selector is moved out of the
NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
operational when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper
operation.
Rear Window Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward
activates the rear window washer. If the lever is
pushed while on the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe
cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is
pushed while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers
will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the radio.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 With 7-inch Display Automatic Temperature
Controls
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display Automatic
Temperature Controls
Max A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the
touchscreen to change the current setting to
the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to
prevent fogging of the windows.
If not operating in AUTO mode, the system will not auto-
matically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the
windshield. Defrost Mode must be manually selected
to clear the windshield and side glass.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost Mode and adjust blower speed if
needed.
Recirculation Button
Press and release the Recirculation button on the
touchscreen, or press the button on the faceplate,
to change the system between recirculation mode
and outside air. The Recirculation indicator and
the A/C indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button is
pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions
such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen grayed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without
disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended. Recirculation mode may automatically adjust
to optimize customer experience for warming, cooling,
dehumidification, etc.
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press the
AUTO button on the touchscreen, or push the
button on the faceplate. AUTO will achieve and
maintain your desired temperature by
automatically adjusting the blower speed and air
distribution. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be active during
AUTO operation to improve performance. AUTO mode is
highly recommended for efficiency. You can turn AUTO on
in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the touchscreen
Push the button on the faceplate
Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic mode
Ú page 70.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button on
the touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current airflow setting
to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates
when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and
side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the Front
Defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost Control
button on the touchscreen or push and release
the button on the faceplate to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the
rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
Front Temperature Control
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
NOTE:
The temperature can also be adjusted by pressing the
Temperature readout on the top left and right corners of
the status bar.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to
toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front
and rear passenger temperature settings with the driver
temperature setting. Changing the front or rear passenger
temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit
this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the climate control system.
There are seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the
blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower
setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the
blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Blower speed can be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons. Press
the desired blower speed from 1-7.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Mode Control
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted
so air comes from the instrument panel outlets,
floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets.
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the knob to
change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
Buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen or push and release the button on
the faceplate to turn the Climate Control ON/
OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front ATC Panel—If Equipped
The Three-Zone Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
system allows for adjustment of the rear climate controls
from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
Press the Rear Climate button on the touchscreen to
display the rear climate controls. Control functions now
operate the rear system.
To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect system,
press the Front Climate or Done button on the touch-
screen.
Uconnect 5 With 10.1-in Display Rear Control Screen
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL BUTTON
Press and release the Rear button to
access the rear climate controls. The indicator
will illuminate when the rear climate controls
are on.
REAR AUTO BUTTON
Press and release the AUTO button on the
touchscreen, within the Rear screen, to change
the current setting. The REAR AUTO indicator
will illuminate when REAR AUTO is on. This
feature automatically controls the rear interior cabin
temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount.
Toggling this function will cause the rear system to switch
between manual mode and automatic modes
Ú page 70.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Press and release this button to lock out the
rear manual temperature controls from
adjusting the rear temperature and blower
settings.
FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON
Press and release the Front button to change
the display on the Uconnect system back to the
Front Climate Controls.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
These buttons provide the front occupants with the ability
to control the rear temperature.
Push the up arrow button on the touchscreen
to increase the temperature.
Push the down arrow button on the
touchscreen to decrease the temperature.
NOTE:
When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s
temperature will move up and down with the driver’s
temperature.
SYNC BUTTON
Press the SYNC To Driver button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off.
The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this
feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize
the front and rear passenger temperature settings with
the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear
passenger temperature/mode/blower settings while in
SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
BLOWER CONTROL
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount
of air forced through the Climate Control
system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower causes
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using the buttons on the
touchscreen.
PANEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to change
the air distribution mode to Panel Mode. In
Panel Mode, air comes from the outlets in the
headliner. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the
air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to change
the air distribution mode to Bi-Level Mode. In
Bi-Level Mode, air comes from both the
headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to change
the air distribution mode to Floor Mode. In Floor
Mode, air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROL OFF
BUTTON
Press and release the OFF button to turn the
Rear Climate Controls off.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) system has
floor air outlets underneath the passengers’ seats, and
overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position.
The system provides heated air through the floor outlets or
cool, dehumidified air through the headliner outlets.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear
ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is
turned off.
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
1. Adjust the rear blower, rear temperature and the
rear modes to suit your comfort needs.
2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and
fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
AUTO BUTTON
The AUTO button automatically controls the
interior cabin temperature by adjusting
distribution and amount of airflow. Performing
this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic modes
Ú page 70.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
To change the temperature in the rear of the
vehicle, push temperature control up button to
raise the temperature. The rear temperature
settings are displayed in control head.
To change the temperature in the rear of the
vehicle, push temperature control down button
to lower the temperature. The rear temperature
settings are displayed in control head.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
The rear blower control can be manually set to
off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing the
blower control buttons. This allows the rear
seat occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the two
icons increases blower speed, whereas the smaller of the
two icons decreases the blower speed.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Push this button on the Rear Climate Controls
to change the air distribution mode for the rear
passengers.
PANEL MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the
air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut
off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and
the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is
designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL/BLOWER OFF
To manually set the rear blower controls to off,
press the Rear Climate Control/Blower Off
button.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 With 7-inch Display Manual Temperature Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button to
change the current setting. The indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C
indicator will turn off.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release the A/C button to change the
current setting. The indicator illuminates when
A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if
needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the
front of the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the
system between recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used
when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all
modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen grayed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. The A/C (Air Conditioning) can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended. On
systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation
mode (if equipped) is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED on
the control button to blink and then turn off.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button to
change the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The indicator illuminates when this
feature is on. Air comes from the windshield
and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button
is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Performing this function will cause the Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If
the Front Defrost mode is turned off the climate system
will return the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control
button to turn on the rear window defroster and
the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An
indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 15 minutes.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Front Temperature Control
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to
toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front
and rear passenger temperature settings with the driver
temperature setting. Changing the front or rear passenger
temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit
this feature. Pressing SYNC on the touchscreen while in
the Front Climate screen synchronizes the driver and
passenger temperatures only. In order to SYNC rear
temperature to driver temperature, the touchscreen must
be on the Rear Climate screen.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount
of air forced through the Climate Control
system. There are seven blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using
either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the
buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the
blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower
setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the
blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the
blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower speed can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted
so air comes from the instrument panel outlets,
floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets.
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the knob to
change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
Buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front MTC Display/Touchscreen
The Three-Zone Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
system allows for adjustment of the rear climate controls
from the front MTC display/touchscreen.
To change the rear system settings:
Press the Rear Climate button on the touchscreen to
display the rear climate controls. The control functions
now operate the rear system.
Press the Front Climate button on the touchscreen to
return to the front climate controls.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL BUTTON
Press and release this button to access the
rear climate controls. The indicator will
illuminate when the rear climate controls
are on.
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Press and release this button to lock out the
rear manual temperature controls from
adjusting the rear temperature and blower
settings.
FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON
Press and release this button to change the
display on the Uconnect system back to the
Front Climate Controls.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
These buttons provide the rear passengers with
independent temperature control.
Push the up arrow button on the touchscreen
to increase the temperature.
Push the down arrow button on the
touchscreen to decrease the temperature.
NOTE:
When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s
temperature moves up and down with the driver’s
temperature.
SYNC BUTTON
Press the SYNC To Driver button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off.
The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this
feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize
the front and rear passenger temperature settings with
the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear
passenger temperature setting while in SYNC exits this
feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
BLOWER CONTROL
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount
of air forced through the Climate Control
system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower causes
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using the buttons on the
touchscreen.
PANEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to change
the air distribution mode to Panel Mode. In
Panel Mode, air comes from the outlets in the
headliner. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the
air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
BI-LEVEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to change
the air distribution mode to Bi-Level Mode. In
Bi-Level Mode, air comes from the headliner
and floor outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level Mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to change
the air distribution mode to Floor Mode. In Floor
Mode, air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROL OFF
BUTTON
Press and release this button to turn the Rear
Climate Controls off.
Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
The rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) system has
floor air outlets at the rear right side of the third row seats
and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating
position. The system provides heated air through the floor
outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the headliner
outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons are located
on the headliner on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
To change the temperature in the rear of the
vehicle, push temperature control up button to
raise the temperature. The rear temperature
settings are displayed in control head.
To change the temperature in the rear of the
vehicle, push temperature control down button
to lower the temperature. The rear temperature
settings are displayed in control head.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
The rear blower control can be manually set to
off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing the
blower control buttons. This allows the rear
seat occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the two
icons increases blower speed, whereas the smaller of the
two icons decreases the blower speed.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Push this button on the Rear Climate Controls
to change the air distribution mode for the rear
passengers.
PANEL MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the
air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut
off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and
the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is
designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control system through an intake grille, located in the
floor under the passengers’ seats. Do not block or
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FLOOR MODE
Air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL/BLOWER OFF
To manually set the rear blower controls to off,
press the Rear Climate Control/Blower Off
button.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC) — I
F EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the U.S./Metric customer-program-
mable feature within the Uconnect system
Ú page 157.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) display will be turned off when
the system is being used in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead
(If vehicle is equipped with climate control).
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep,
say one of the following commands:
“
Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“
Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats
or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested
control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system is
functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and
concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control system
when the vehicle is being stored for an extended period of
time, see
Ú page 299.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your
cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Release Handle
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the indentation to open the
compartment.
Overhead Sunglass Door Latch
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather
And Vehicle
Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control to (Panel
Mode), (A/C) on, and blower on
high. Roll down the windows for a
minute to flush out the hot air. Adjust
the controls as needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and set the mode
control to (Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to (Floor
Mode) and turn (A/C) on to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to (Floor
Mode). If windshield fogging starts to
occur, move the control to (Mix
Mode).
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning
the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to
avoid injury.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Storage Drawers — If Equipped
There may be a storage drawer located in the lower center
of the instrument panel, or as part of the center console.
It can be released by pushing the access button above the
drawer. The drawer is actuator assisted once the access
button is pushed. Pull drawer outward to the fully open
position.
Instrument Panel Storage Drawer
Front Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The front seatbacks have a storage pocket on some
models.
Front Seatback Storage
Second Row Floor Storage Bins
There are removable storage bins (if equipped) located in
the areas below the load floor, located in front of the
second row seats.
In Floor Storage Bin
1. To access the storage bins with front seats in the
rearward position, place the lock rod in the unlocked
position so the load floor can fold upwards towards
the seatback.
Lock Rod
CAUTION!
The storage drawer must be closed while driving. If left
open during a collision, additional damage may occur to
property or the drawer mechanism.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked posi-
tion.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to
open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
STORAGE BIN SAFETY WARNING
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
SEAT STORAGE BIN COVER EMERGENCY
RELEASE LEVER
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover has an
Emergency Release Lever built into the latching
mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
NOTE:
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark lever
attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lie flat and be latched to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the
storage bin cover is left in the open position, front seat
adjustment may damage the cover.
WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
Do not allow children to have access to the second
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young
children may not be able to escape. If trapped in the
storage bin, children can die from suffocation or heat
stroke.
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lie flat and be latched to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the
storage bin cover is left in the open position, front seat
adjustment may damage the cover.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTED CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED
On some vehicles, the front cupholders are equipped with
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the front
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Controls
Ú page 58.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for second and third row seating
windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels, and the
tops of the windows are equipped with hooks that the sun
screens attach to when pulled out.
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. Continue
pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the top of the
window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
Sun Screen Extended
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
base sill.
USB/AUX CONTROL
There are numerous USB ports located throughout the
vehicle that allow an external USB device to be plugged
into the USB port.
NOTE:
If a smartphone is plugged into a video USB port, the
device will only have charging capability and allow for
files/media to be stored, if equipped with Uconnect
Theater.
Once a device is connected to the USB port, it will begin
charging and is ready for use with the system. Type C
and Type A charge-only USB ports can be used at the
same time but cannot be used simultaneously while
playing media. When both Type C and Type A
charge-only USB ports are in use they will be charged at
a reduced rate.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB port
and another device is plugged into the Type C USB port, a
message will appear and allow you to select which device
to use.
Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB Ports
There are multiple USB “Charge Only” ports in this vehicle.
In the center console
On the instrument panel
On the back of the front row seats in the Uconnect
Theater Media Hubs (if equipped)
On the back of the front row seats
Above the rear cup holder in the third row of seats
1 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 1
2 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 2
3 — AUX Port
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Charge Only USB In The Center Console
NOTE:
The USB outlet in the bottom of the instrument panel can
be switched from ignition only to constant battery powered
all the time. See an authorized dealer for details.
Rear Seat USB Charging Port Without Uconnect Theater
Rear Seat USB Media Hub With Uconnect Theater
3rd Row USB Charging Port
NOTE:
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery
operated USB devices when connected.
Different scenarios are listed below when a non-phone
device is plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports,
and when a phone device is plugged into the smaller and
larger USB ports:
“A new device is now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
“Another device is in use through the same USB port.
Please disconnect the first device to use the second
device.”
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause the
connection to a previous device to be lost.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen that
the device is not supported by the system.
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets can be labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a key symbol are powered
when the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, while
the outlets labeled with a battery symbol are connected
directly to the battery and powered at all times.
1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — HDMI Port
3 — USB Port (Charge Only)
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the battery powered outlets
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in
use to protect the battery against discharge.
Depending on the type of center console your vehicle is
equipped with, there is a front power outlet located either
on the bottom of the instrument panel or inside the center
console.
12 Volt Front Power Outlet (In Floor Tray) - If Equipped
12 Volt Front Power Outlet (In Center Console)
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the rear cargo area.
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
area.
Rear Power Outlet
NOTE:
The front power outlet can be changed to battery powered at
all times by switching the power outlet fuse in the Power
Distribution Center panel from fuse location F95A to F95B.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do
not insert any other object in the power outlets as this
will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use
of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
1 — F95A (Ignition)/F95B (Battery) Front Power Outlet 10A
2 — F85 Cigar Lighter 20A
3 — F60 RR Cargo Power Outlet 20A
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 W Power Inverter outlet located
on the right side of the vehicle, before the third row of
seats to convert DC current to AC current. The Power
Inverter can power cellular phones, electronics and other
low power devices requiring up to 150 W. Certain video
game consoles will exceed this power limit, as will most
power tools.
Power Inverter
The Power Inverter turns on when the device is plugged in,
and the ignition is in ON/RUN position. It turns off when
the device is unplugged or the ignition is no longer in ON/
RUN position.
The Power Inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 W is exceeded, the
Power Inverter shuts down. Once the electrical device has
been removed from the Power Inverter, it resets. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on
electrical devices prior to using the Power Inverter.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —
I
F EQUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad Location
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi wireless
charging pad located inside of the storage area below the
climate controls. This charging pad is designed to
wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a
standard that allows wireless charging of your mobile
phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi wireless
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a
specialized back plate can be purchased from your mobile
phone provider or a local electronics retailer. Please see
your phone’s owner’s manual for further information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat to hold your mobile phone in place, and an LED
indicator light.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LED Indicator Status:
No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a device.
Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging.
Red Light/Flashing: Internal error or foreign object is
detected.
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless
Charging Pad:
The wireless charging pad will not work if any of the
four doors or the liftgate are open, even if the engine is
running.
Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone is
connected to a wired charger.
The phone’s protective case must be removed when
placed on the wireless charging pad.
iPhone® 12 (including iPod®) is equipped with soft-
ware to protect the device from overheating. When the
software is active, the rate of charge is slowed down to
protect the device.
Phones must always be placed on the wireless
charging pad within the outline shown on the pad so
that its charging parts connect with the charging coils
of the system. Movement of the phone during charging
may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
Having multiple applications open on the phone while
charging will reduce the charging efficiency, and may
even shut down an application that is actively running
(i.e. Apple CarPlay®). This may also cause the phone to
overheat.
Wireless chargers may implement certain methods to
prevent the phone from overheating during charging
such as slowing down the rate of charge. In certain
instances, the device may shut down for a brief period
of time (when the device reaches a certain tempera-
ture). If this happens, it does not mean there is a fault
with the wireless charing pad. This may just be a
protective measure to prevent damage to the phone.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The window switches on the driver’s door trim panel
control all of the door windows.
Driver’s Power Window Controls
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
pushing the bar control just below the power window
controls.
Window Lockout Switch
The window switches will operate only when the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN position and during power
accessory delay.
NOTE:
Power Window controls will also remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition has been placed in the OFF
position, depending upon the accessory delay setting.
Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
There is a single control on the front passenger’s door trim
panel which operates the passenger door window and a
set of controls that lock and unlock all doors. The controls
will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position and during power accessory delay.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad
or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can cause
excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob. Placing
the fob in close proximity of the charging pad blocks the
fob from being detected by the vehicle and prevents the
vehicle from starting.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control — If Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single control on the door handle
assembly.
The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position and during power accessory
delay.
NOTE:
The controls will not operate if the driver has activated the
Power Window Lockout.
Sliding Door Power Window Control (Left Side Shown)
NOTE:
The sliding door windows do not fully open, stopping
several inches above the window sill.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch down to the second detent, release, and the
window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during the
Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the switch
briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up to the second detent, and
release; the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch briefly
and release it when you want the window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it
will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the
obstacle and use the window switch again to close the
window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If
this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close the
window manually.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window may
need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window control up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the control up for
an additional two seconds after the window is
closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after the window
is fully open.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open
or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence
and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The Panoramic Sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The Power Shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Panoramic Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
Express Open/Close
Push the open switch and release it within one second.
The sunroof will open automatically from any position and
stop at the full open position. This is called Express Open.
Push the close switch and release it within one second
and the sunroof will close automatically from any position.
The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is
called Express Close.
NOTE:
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
If the sunshade is in the closed position when the open
switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically cycle
to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the open switch and the sunroof will open
to the full open position.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the close switch.
Any release of the switch during open or close operation
will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a
partially open condition until the sunroof switch is pushed
again.
1 — Sunroof Switch
2 — Power Shade Switch
3 — Vent Button
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result
in serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passengers are also
properly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWER
S
UNSHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The sunshade has two programmed open positions:
half-open and full-open. When opening the sunshade from
the closed position, the sunshade will always stop at the
half-open position regardless of express or manual open
operation. The switch must be actuated again to continue
to the full-open position.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade open switch and release it within one
second and the sunshade will open to the half-open
position and stop automatically. Push and release the
sunshade open switch again from the half-open position
and the sunshade will open to the full-open position and
stop automatically. This is called Express Open.
Push the sunshade close switch and release it within one
second and the sunshade will close automatically from
any position. If the sunroof is completely closed, the shade
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close.
NOTE:
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunshade switch will stop the shade.
If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button
again will automatically close both the sunroof and
shade completely.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade open switch and the shade
will open to the half-open position and stop automatically.
Push and hold the sunshade open switch again and the
shade will open automatically to the full-open position.
To close the shade, push and hold the sunshade close
switch.
Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the
sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until
the switch is pushed again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the
sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction
if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch
Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
VENTING SUNROOF
Push and release the Vent button within one second and
the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called
Express Vent, and it will occur regardless of sunroof
position.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when the vent
switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically cycle to
the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opening to
the Vent position.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition off timing is programmable through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 157.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear out any
debris that may have collected in the tracks.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
OPENING
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
The hood release lever (to open the primary latch) and
safety latch (to open the secondary latch) must be
released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the front of the vehicle.
3. Push the safety latch release lever toward the
passenger side of the vehicle. The safety latch is
located behind the center front edge of the hood.
Safety Latch Release Lever Location
4. Remove the support rod from the locking tab and
insert it into the seat located on the underside of the
hood.
NOTE:
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are
not in motion and not in the lifted position.
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must
be in PARK.
CLOSING
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other
hand remove the support rod from its seat and
reinsert it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
from the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure
that the hood is completely closed.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood
is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
Key fob
Liftgate Release Handle
Button on overhead console
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to release the liftgate.
The key fob and the overhead console button will release
the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside handle
requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the vehicle is
equipped with Passive Entry, pulling the electronic liftgate
release handle will unlock and release the liftgate, with a
valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate.
Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
NOTE:
When you pull the electronic liftgate release handle, either
only the liftgate will unlock, or all the doors and the liftgate
will unlock, depending on the selected setting in the
Uconnect system
Ú page 157.
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate closing
handle and pull in a downward motion.
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in several
ways:
Overhead console liftgate button
Key fob
Outside handle (open or reset liftgate latch)
Rear Interior Power Liftgate button (when liftgate is open)
Hands-Free Liftgate (if equipped) — opens liftgate only
Using the above ways to open or close the liftgate:
When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will open
When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close
When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse
Push the Power Liftgate button on the overhead console to
open or close the liftgate.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open or close the liftgate.
Overhead Console Power Switches
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passen-
gers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate
closed when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
1 — Liftgate
2 — Left Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Right Sliding Door
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The key fob and the overhead console button will operate
the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside handle
requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the vehicle is
equipped with Passive Entry, pressing the touch pad on
the outside handle or Hands-Free Liftgate foot activation
(if equipped) will unlock and open the liftgate, with a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate
handle.
NOTE:
To open the liftgate, the Hands-Free Liftgate foot acti-
vation (if equipped) requires a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.
When you pull the electronic liftgate release handle,
either only the liftgate will unlock, or all the doors and
the liftgate will unlock, depending on the selected
setting in the Uconnect system.
Tones are sounded and the turn signals are flashed
with liftgate movements. These alerts can be turned on
or off in Uconnect Settings
Ú page 157.
To Close The Liftgate
The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear Interior
Power Liftgate button (if equipped), located in the upper
left trim in the liftgate opening.
Rear Interior Power Liftgate Button
NOTE:
If the power liftgate will not fully open or latch close, check
the latch for damage or obstacles that may be preventing
the closing operation. If the problem persists, proceed as
follows:
1. Press the electronic liftgate release handle on the
outside of the liftgate to home/reset the latch
mechanism.
2. Manually close the liftgate by pulling downward using
the closing handle.
3. Resume normal power liftgate open or closing
operation.
If the home/reset procedure is unsuccessful, see an
authorized dealer for service.
HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
To open the liftgate using hands-free activation, use a
straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle
activation zone in the general location below the liftgate
door handle. You may also move your foot sideways or in
a sweeping motion.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Vehicles Equipped With A Trailer Tow Package
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow Package,
the hands-free activation zone(s) for the Power Liftgate
will be located on the left and right side of the receiver.
Use a straight kicking motion under either activation zone
to open the Hands-Free Liftgate.
Hands-Free Liftgate Trailer Tow Activation Zones
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the liftgate will
chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate will open
after approximately one second. This assumes all options
are enabled in the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
To open the Hands-Free Liftgate requires a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle. If a
valid Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the
liftgate will not respond to any kicks.
NOTE:
The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the
transmission is in PARK.
If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate while it is
opening or closing, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed position, provided it meets suffi-
cient resistance.
There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the lift-
gate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open posi-
tion.
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop.
If this occurs, the liftgate must be operated manually.
The power liftgate will release, but not power open, in
temperatures below −12°F (−24°C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate
before opening the liftgate.
If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
power liftgate functionality.
The Hands-Free Liftgate only works to open the liftgate.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with
temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually
pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the liftgate
obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation
or reverse its direction.
CAUTION!
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or off
in Uconnect Settings. The Hands-Free Liftgate feature
should be turned off during jacking, tire changing, and
vehicle service
Ú page 157.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Area Storage
When the third row seats are not in the stowed position,
there is a large area for cargo storage.
Rear Cargo Area
NOTE:
With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 ft (1.2 x
2.4 m) sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle
floor with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be
moved slightly forward of the rearmost position.
Stow ‘n Vac Integrated Vacuum —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an integrated vacuum
system. This vacuum is for in-vehicle use only and should
only be used on dry materials and on in-vehicle surfaces.
It is located in the rear trim panel behind the sliding door
on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read all instructions before using. When using your
vacuum, basic precautions should be followed, including
the following:
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in either the ACC
position, or engine running (ON), unless you are
using the vacuum system. Be aware a child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle when the vacuum system is in use. ALWAYS
push ignition button to place ignition in the OFF posi-
tion when finished using the vacuum system.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of fire, serious injury or death:
Do not use vacuum while vehicle is in
motion or while driving.
Do not vacuum wet surfaces or any liquids.
Do not use to vacuum up anything outside of the
vehicle.
Do not vacuum any flammable liquids,
such as gasoline, or use around explosive
vapors. Vapors from flammable liquids may
form an explosive mixture with air and can
be ignited by heat, sparks, or flames. Vapors
may travel to a source of ignition and explode.
Do not vacuum anything that is burning or smoking,
such as cigarettes, matches, or hot ashes/embers.
Do not allow to be used as a toy. Close attention is
necessary when used by or near children.
Do not leave the vacuum running while unattended.
Use only as described in this manual. Use only
attachments provided with your vehicle.
Do not put any object into openings. Do not use with
any opening blocked; keep free of dust, lint, hair, and
anything that may reduce air flow.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
(Continued)
The vacuum will operate in two modes:
Ignition in the ACC position: Engine remains off, and
vacuum usage is limited to 10 minutes.
Ignition in the START position: Engine is running, and
vacuum usage is unlimited until the vehicle’s battery
level falls below 60%.
NOTE:
The vacuum will not operate when the ignition is in the OFF
position, or in the ON/RUN position with the engine off. For
more information on ignition positions, see
Ú page 15.
1. Before Using Vacuum:
Accessory (ACC) Mode Operation - For up to
10 minutes of operation
Always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission
into PARK, and push ignition button to place ignition in
Accessory (ACC) mode. The engine will not be running
in this mode. Do not leave the key fob in or near the ve-
hicle, or in a location accessible to children.
NOTE:
The vacuum system will run for 10 minutes off battery
power and then the vacuum will shut down. A low battery
indication light (LOW PWR) located below the vacuum
nozzle storage location will come on one minute before
the vacuum shuts down.
Engine Running (START) Operation - For more than
10 minutes of operation
Position vehicle outdoors and fully open all side
windows.
Always apply the parking brake, shift the transmis-
sion into PARK, and leave engine running.
2. Unclip the vacuum nozzle and pull to extend vacuum
hose from the storage location.
NOTE:
The hose can reach every corner of the vehicle floor.
3. Install desired attachment if needed.
Front Storage Compartments
Do not vacuum toxic material such as chlorine
bleach, ammonia, drain cleaner, etc.
Do not vacuum hard or sharp objects such as glass,
nails, screws, coins, etc.
Keep hair, loose clothing, fingers, and all parts of
body away from openings and moving parts.
Only use with filter in place. Periodically check that
the filter is in place and in good condition.
WARNING!
This equipment incorporates parts such as switches,
motors, or the like that tend to produce arcs or sparks
that can cause an explosion. When using your vacuum
near gasoline-dispensing equipment or service
stations, park vehicle at least 20 ft (6 m) away from the
exterior enclosure of any dispensing pump. The vacuum
is mounted more than 18 inches (45 cm) above ground
level in your vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases can cause
serious injury or death. Follow these precautions to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases.
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Always position vehicle outdoors and
fully open all side windows before using vacuum
system with the engine running.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly.
1 — Vacuum Nozzle Storage Location
2 — Attachment Compartment
WARNING!
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
To access crevice or upholstery attachments, open the
front Attachment Compartment.
Crevice Tool — Able to reach into tight spaces
including the seat latches located in the floor.
Upholstery Tool — Use to agitate dirt and debris
from carpets and seats. This tool can also be used
to pick up pet hair.
Hose Extension — Use to add another 12 ft (3.6 m)
of usable length to the vacuum hose. Hose exten-
sion is provided in a bag attached to a grocery
hook behind the third row seat on the driver’s side.
4. Push the vacuum on/off button located under the
vacuum nozzle storage location. Use vacuum as
needed.
NOTE:
When the vacuum is ON, the LED indicator on the
on/off button will illuminate.
When the vacuum is OFF, the LED indicator will
also be off.
After nine minutes of operation in ACC mode
(engine not running), the Low Power Indicator
Light (LOW PWR) will illuminate.
Power Buttons
1 — Low Power Indicator Light
2 — On/Off Button
WARNING!
For in vehicle use ONLY. To reduce the risk of fire,
serious injury or death:
Do not use vacuum while vehicle is in
motion or while driving.
Do not vacuum wet surfaces or any liquids.
Do not use to vacuum up anything outside of the
vehicle.
Do not vacuum any flammable liquids,
such as gasoline, or use around explosive
vapors. Vapors from flammable liquids may
form an explosive mixture with air and can
be ignited by heat, sparks, or flames. Vapors
may travel to a source of ignition and explode.
Do not vacuum anything that is burning or smoking,
such as cigarettes, matches, or hot ashes/embers.
Do not allow to be used as a toy. Close attention is
necessary when used by or near children.
Do not leave the vacuum running while unattended.
Use only as described in this manual. Use only
attachments provided with your vehicle.
Do not put any object into openings. Do not use with
any opening blocked; keep free of dust, lint, hair, and
anything that may reduce air flow.
Do not vacuum toxic material such as chlorine
bleach, ammonia, drain cleaner, etc.
Do not vacuum hard or sharp objects such as glass,
nails, screws, coins, etc.
Keep hair, loose clothing, fingers, and all parts of
body away from openings and moving parts.
Only use with filter in place. Periodically check that
the filter is in place and in good condition.
WARNING!
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
5. When finished, push power button to turn vacuum off
and store vacuum hose and any attachments.
6. Before exiting the vehicle:
If the ignition is in the ACC position, push the
START/STOP ignition button to place ignition in the
OFF position, remove key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
If the engine is running, raise all of the windows,
push the START/STOP ignition button to place igni-
tion in the OFF position, remove key fob from the
vehicle, close all of the doors and the liftgate and
lock the vehicle.
Vacuum Troubleshooting
DO NOT use with any opening blocked. If an object
becomes lodged in the hose, attempt to fully extend
the hose in a straight line while the vacuum motor is
running. If this does not dislodge the object, turn the
vacuum OFF and remove the hose from the vehicle
using the subsequent removal instructions. If the filter
is clogged, follow the emptying debris bin procedure
and lightly tap the filter on the collection bin to remove
any collected debris from the filter. Both the bin and
the filter can be rinsed with water if needed. To avoid
mold and stale odors, allow both to dry completely
before reinstalling in your vehicle. If the filter has tears,
holes or other damage and needs to be replaced,
please contact an authorized dealer.
If there are any other issues with your vacuum, contact
an authorized dealer. Your vacuum has no user
serviceable parts.
Debris Bin
The debris bin is located behind the access panel behind
the third row seat on the driver’s side.
To Empty
1. Push power button to turn vacuum OFF.
2. Open the access panel by pulling the finger grip
towards you and then pull downward.
Vacuum System Access Panel
3. Twist the release knob counterclockwise and pull the
bin towards you.
Debris Bin Release Knob
4. Remove the filter and dump the debris in a trash can.
Lightly tap the filter on the collection bin to remove
loose debris from the filter. If the filter is clogged from
extended use, have the filter replaced by an
authorized dealer.
5. Reverse the procedure to reinstall.
NOTE:
The debris bin must be fully installed and locked for the
vacuum to function properly.
Hose Access Port
The hose access port is located behind the access panel
behind the third row seat on the driver’s side.
WARNING!
This equipment incorporates parts such as switches,
motors, or the like that tend to produce arcs or sparks
that can cause an explosion. When using your vacuum
near gasoline-dispensing equipment or service
stations, park vehicle at least 20 ft (6 m) away from the
exterior enclosure of any dispensing pump. The vacuum
is mounted more than 18 inches (45 cm) above ground
level in your vehicle.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Remove Vacuum Hose For Cleaning
1. Open the access panel.
Vacuum System Access Panel
2. Open the small access panel on the upper right side,
and unclip the hose from the hose access port by
pushing the yellow vacuum hose release lever with
right thumb and lifting the hose with index finger.
Vacuum Hose Release Lever
3. Return to vacuum nozzle storage location located
behind the sliding door.
4. Grab the vacuum nozzle and gently pull the hose out
through vacuum nozzle storage location.
5. Shake the hose to remove any objects stuck in the
hose. Take care not to perforate the hose while
attempting to dislodge any objects.
6. Reverse the procedure to reinstall and clip the hose
into place.
STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack.
The load must
not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed within
the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always be used
whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the
straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
Roof Rack
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
The Stow ‘n Place roof rack does not increase the total
load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load
of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack
does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
DEPLOYING THE CROSSBARS
1. To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the
thumb screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift
the crossbar from its stowed position in the side rail.
Repeat with crossbar on the opposite side.
Thumb Screw
NOTE:
The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
Removing Crossbars
2. Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care
to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb
screw down.
Bending Pivot
3. Position the crossbars across the roof making sure
the letters on the crossbars align with the matching
letters on the side rail.
Positioning Crossbars
4. Once the crossbar is in place, tighten both thumb
screws completely.
Installing Crossbars
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete
the deployment of the crossbars.
NOTE:
The crossbars are not identical and have fixed deployment
positions. Rear crossbar can be deployed in two different
positions.
STOWING THE CROSSBARS
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the
thumb screws at both ends. Lift the crossbar away
from the matching letter to remove it from the
deployed position. Repeat with the other crossbar.
2. Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot
supports at each end.
Crossbar Pivot
3. Then, position the crossbar along the correct side rail.
Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
Stowing Crossbars
4. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
Crossbar To Side Rail
5. Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the
thumb screws completely.
Tightening Crossbar
6. Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on
the opposite side.
Stowed Crossbars
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
(Continued)
NOTE:
To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption
of satellite radio reception.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Anything improperly secured to the roof rack,
crossbars, or the roof itself can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in collisions,
personal injury, or property damage. Follow the roof
rack cautions when carrying anything on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or other protective layer between the
load and the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150
lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and appropriately secure the load and any
protective layer placed between the load and the roof
surface.
Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps and
thumb wheels frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
Long loads that extend over the windshield, such as
wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large frontal
area should be secured to both the front and rear of
the vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
CAUTION!
2
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
3
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (RPM x
1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages
Ú page 97.
The display shows one of the main menu items
after the ignition is turned/placed on.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal range
indicates that the engine cooling system is oper-
ating satisfactorily.
The gauge can indicate a higher temperature
when driving in hot weather or up mountain
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
is located.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when the
ignition is first cycled.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You
may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats
Ú page 271.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reaches “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the gauge drops back into
the normal range and is no longer red. If the gauge
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the OFF position (and the key removed, for
vehicles with mechanical key), opening/closing of a door
will activate the display for viewing, and display the total
miles or kilometers in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the
instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can
show you how systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted controls
allow you to scroll through and enter the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The vehicle’s instrument cluster is equipped with an
instrument cluster display (base or premium cluster),
which offers useful information to the driver.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
The instrument cluster display controls allows the driver to
select information by pushing the directional buttons
mounted on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
3
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Back / Left Arrow Button
Push and release the
left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a main
menu item.
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the
up arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the
right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a main
menu item.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the
down arrow button to scroll
downward through the Main Menu items.
OK Button
Push the
OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item.
Push and hold the
OK button for two seconds to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
ENGINE OIL LIFE
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
engine oil change indicator system.
The “Oil Change Required”
message will display for approxi-
mately five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate it is
time to change the engine oil. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
To reset the oil change indicator after performing the
scheduled maintenance, refer to the following proce-
dure.
NOTE:
This procedure should only be performed after scheduled
maintenance is completed. Resetting oil life other than
when associated with a scheduled maintenance may
result in damage due to not properly maintaining the
engine oil.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (do not start the vehicle.)
2. Push the OK button to enter the instrument cluster
display menu screen.
3. Push and release the
down arrow button to
access the ”Vehicle Info” menu screen.
4. Push the
left arrow button or right arrow button
to access the “Oil Life” submenu.
5. Hold the
OK button to reset the “Oil Life” to 100%.
6. Push the
up arrow button to exit the instrument
cluster display menu screen.
Secondary Method For Oil Life Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
KEYSENSE CLUSTER MESSAGES —
I
F EQUIPPED
When the KeySense key is in use there will be:
Continuous, dedicated telltale
Unique Display Splash Screen
With KeySense in use there will be multiple associated
messages shown in the following table:
Setting
Instrument Cluster Display
Message
None – With vehicle
ignition ON
“KeySense in use. Max
vehicle speed set to xx
MPH/or km/h”
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
main menu items for several features. Use the
up and
down arrow buttons to scroll through the driver
interactive display menu options until the desired menu is
reached
Ú page 97.
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items display in the
center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary
depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
Speedometer is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the
OK button to toggle between
MPH and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
Vehicle Info is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push the
left or right arrow button to scroll
through the following information submenus:
Tire Pressure
If tire pressure is
OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To XX”
is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire pressure
values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value
of the low tire displayed in a different color than the other
tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset
Ú page 197.
Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Transmission Temp
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temp — If Equipped
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Max Vehicle Speed
“Max speed reached.
KeySense in use”
supported by a chime
“Approaching max
speed xx MPH/km/h”
supported by a chime
Start Up Fuel Alert
message
“Range to empty xxx miles
or km”
Early Low Fuel Alert
Message
“Fuel Low”
ParkSense
“Feature cannot be
disabled. KeySense in
use”
Blind Spot
“Feature cannot be
disabled. KeySense in
use”
Forward Collision Warning
“Feature cannot be
disabled. KeySense in
use”
Setting
Instrument Cluster Display
Message
3
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Life
Displays the remaining engine oil life as a percentage.
To reset the Oil Life, you must hold the
OK button. The
“Hold OK to Reset” instruction will be displayed at all
times, but the following conditions will need to be met in
order to reset Oil Life:
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position.
If the conditions are met, holding the
OK button will reset
the gauge and the numeric display will return to 100%.
If the conditions are not met, a pop-up message will
display for five seconds, describing the required
conditions, and then the Oil Life screen will reappear.
Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Engine Hours — If Equipped
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Driver Assist display icon is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control
LaneSense
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. The Fuel Economy Menu will
display the following:
Two submenu pages that can be toggled between
using the
left and right arrow buttons; one with
Current Value displayed and one without the Current
Value displayed:
Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Range To Empty (miles or km)
Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements
Hold
OK to reset average fuel economy information.
Trip Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push the
left or right arrow button to scroll
through the Trip A and Trip B submenus. The Trip
information will display the following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Hold the
OK button to reset feature information.
Stop / Start – If Equipped
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
Audio
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Audio Menu displays in the instrument cluster display.
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
Messages is highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
This feature shows the number of stored warning
messages. Pushing the
right arrow button will allow you
to see what the stored messages are.
NOTE:
The pop-up messages indicate the status of the system
and/or the conditions that need to be met. Messages
remain in the stored stack until condition is cleared.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the
OK button to enter the
submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to
change what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
SCREEN SETUP OPTIONS
Defaults
Restore
Cancel
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
SCREEN SETUP OPTIONS
Odometer
Show
Hide
Defaults
Restore
Cancel
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the 12 Volt vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating,
electrical load reduction actions will take place to extend
the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done
by reducing power to or turning off non-essential 12 Volt
electrical loads. Load reduction will be functional when
the vehicle propulsion system is active.
The vehicle may not be running depending on the High
Voltage (HV) battery State Of Charge (SOC) or
temperature. It will display a message if there is a risk of
battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall
due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
current drive cycle.
When 12 Volt load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in
the instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at
a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
Upper Left or Upper Right
None Compass Outside Temp
Time Range
Average (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Current (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Center
None Compass Outside Temp
Time Range
Average (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Current (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance
Audio Menu Title Digital Speed
Lower Left or Lower Right
None Compass Outside Temp
Time Range
Average (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Current (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Trip B Distance Trip A Distance
Upper Center
None Compass Outside Temp
Time Range
Average (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Current (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Digital Speed Menu Title
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance Audio/Phone
3
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system
Ú page 103.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be effected by load
reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
loads are larger than the capability of charging system.
The charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, over-
loaded power outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar
devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum cleaners,
game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load
and Ignition Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/
or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you
are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to
the information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a
fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until
the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed. This indicator
will reflect which doors are open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning
Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
system
Ú page 121.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
3
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle
is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals
are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime
will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to
cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn
it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return
to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service
Ú page 253.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the hood
is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as
soon as possible, and contact an authorized
dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns
on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or
passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the
ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash
or remain on continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 200.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This may
occur with strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle
and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light
turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to
drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated
you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security system is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the ACC system. Contact a local
authorized dealer for service
Ú page 124.
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
Electric Park Brake is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The light
will turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not
also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the ESC
system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out
with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle
has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light
come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid
yellow when the vehicle is approaching a lane
marker. The warning light will flash when the
vehicle is crossing the lane marker
Ú page 140.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
1.85 gal (7 L) this warning light will turn on, and
remain on until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel Warning.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature
Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe
transmission damage or transmission failure.
3
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate and a single
chime will sound when the windshield washer
fluid is low.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/
RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most situations,
the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the All
Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
or Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the FCW or PEB Warning System.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
Ú page 195.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
requires service. Please see an authorized
dealer.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service
Ú page 121.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not
be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition previously
mentioned, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This
can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian
Emergency Braking (PEB) is off.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Vehicle Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and the
vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 124.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and there
is no vehicle in front detected
Ú page 124.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set to the desired speed
Ú page 123.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on.
KeySense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The KeySense indicator is illuminated when a
KeySense key is detected upon startup of the
vehicle. The indicator will remain lit for the
entire key cycle as a reminder that the
KeySense key is in use. While the KeySense key is in use,
the vehicle will respond to settings associated with the
KeySense profile
Ú page 12.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” and ready
to provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs
Ú page 140.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode
Ú page 121.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash
independently and the corresponding exterior
turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi-
cator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
vehicle equipped with ACC has been turned on
but not set
Ú page 124.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is ready, but not set Ú page 123.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not
armed, the LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid white. This occurs when only
left, right, or neither lane line has been
detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is
ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line
Ú page 140.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
Set Speed Display Indicator Light
The Set Speed Display indicator light indicates
the set speed for the Cruise Control and
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) settings.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With the
low beams activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward
you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass”
scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as emissions well
within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a connection
port to allow access to information related to the
performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
service technicians may need to access this information to
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system
Ú page 157.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions tests can be
performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
3
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning
and is not on when the engine is running, and
that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may
not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this
test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
not ready and you
should
not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-
minated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the previously mentioned test
routine may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
111
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL (N)
or PARK (P) position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using the ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10
seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions; OFF, ACC, and ON/
RUN. To change the ignition positions without starting the
vehicle and to use the accessories, follow these steps:
Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (instrument cluster will
display “ACC”).
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to
place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (instrument
cluster will display “ON/RUN”).
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (instrument
cluster will display “OFF”).
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure is
detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster
Ú page 97.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with placing
the vehicle in PARK under certain situations. It is a
back-up system and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into
PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in PARK
by looking for the “P” in the instrument cluster display and
on the gear selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver attempts to turn
off the engine, if certain conditions are met, the vehicle
will AutoPark, automatically shifting the vehicle’s
transmission to the PARK position. The gear selector will
automatically reset itself to the PARK position. The
vehicle’s ignition will then move to the OFF position
(engine off). When AutoPark is activated the instrument
cluster will display the message “AutoPark Engaged”.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver has pushed the ENGINE START/STOP button
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle
with the engine running, if certain conditions are met, the
vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shifting the vehicle’s
transmission to the PARK position. The Electric Park Brake
SAFE HOLD feature will also activate in some conditions
Ú page 116.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s door is ajar
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “
AutoPark Engaged” will display in the
instrument cluster.
AutoPark In Stop/Start Autostop Mode
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s door is ajar
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled or brake pedal is not
pressed
The message “
AutoPark Engaged” will display in the
instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster
display and near the gear selector. If the “P” indicator
is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
CAUTION!
Engine will remain running.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the trans-
mission gear selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the
transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
erly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
(Continued)
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition switch
must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on the brake
pedal, then push the parking brake switch momentarily.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may
Park.
PARK will engage
ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “
Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P” will
display in the instrument cluster display if vehicle speed is
above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). The gear position indicator will
blink continuously until the gear selector is returned to the
proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP THE
E
NGINE
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
WARNING!
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is not below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) when
the driver shifts into PARK, the transmission will default
to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops below
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) and the conditions are met,
enabling AutoPark. A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
T
O TURN OFF THE ENGINE USING THE
ENGINE START/STOP B
UTTON
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC
position until the gear selector is in PARK and the
button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear
selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP
button is pushed once, the instrument cluster will
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out
of the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or ON/RUN (engine
not running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the passenger’s side headlamp. Follow these
steps to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the
passenger’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures the heater
cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
hook-and-loop strap and properly stow it away behind
the passenger’s side headlamp.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are
available from an authorized dealer.
The engine block heater will require 110 Volt AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly
Ú page 251.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 264.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers simple
operation, and some additional features that make the
parking brake more convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied. Also,
be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways;
Manually, by applying the EPB switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature
in the customer programmable features
Ú page 158.
The EPB is located in the integrated center stack.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, push the switch
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back of the
vehicle while the parking brake engages. Once the parking
brake is fully engaged, the Brake Warning Light in the
instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will
illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you
apply the parking brake, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement. The parking brake can be applied
even when the ignition switch is OFF, however, it can only
be released when the ignition switch in the ACC or ON/
RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB Warning Light will illuminate if the EPB switch is
held for longer than 180 seconds. The light will extinguish
upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the
transmission is placed into PARK. Once the parking brake
is engaged, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument
cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will illuminate.
If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a small
amount of brake pedal movement while the parking brake
is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position, the transmission
is in DRIVE or REVERSE, and the driver seat belt is buckled
and an attempt is made to drive the vehicle away by
pressing the accelerator pedal.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition switch
must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on the brake
pedal, then push the parking brake switch momentarily.
You may hear a sound from the back of the vehicle while
the parking brake disengages. You may also notice a small
amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once the parking
brake is fully disengaged, the Brake Warning Light in the
instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will
extinguish.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from
the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion,
push on the EPB switch for as long as engagement is
desired. The Brake Warning Light will illuminate, and a
continuous chime will sound. The rear stop lamps will also
be illuminated automatically while the vehicle remains in
motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle
reaches approximately 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the parking
brake will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB system, a
yellow EPB Warning Light will illuminate. This may be
accompanied by the Brake Warning Light flashing. In this
case, urgent service of the EPB system is required. Do not
rely on the parking brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) can be programmed to be
applied automatically whenever the vehicle is at a
standstill and the automatic transmission is placed in
PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled by
customer selection through the customer programmable
features
Ú page 158.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake
(EPB) system that will engage the parking brake
automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured. If the
automatic transmission is not in PARK, the seat belt is
unbuckled, the driver door is open, the vehicle is at a
standstill, and there is no attempt to press the brake pedal
or accelerator pedal, the parking brake will automatically
engage to prevent the vehicle from rolling.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the EPB
while the driver door is open and brake pedal is pressed.
Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again
once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition
is cycled to the OFF position and back to ON again.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged,
or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the
vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake
system.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
(Continued)
(Continued)
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You
should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the Electric Park Brake (EPB) system,
this can only be done after retracting the EPB actuator.
Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done easily by
entering Brake Service in your vehicle
Ú page 158. This
menu-based system will guide you through the steps
necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to perform
rear brake service.
Brake Service has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be unapplied.
The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in Brake Service, the EPB Warning Light will flash
continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out
of PARK.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have
the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the trans-
mission gear selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the
transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
erly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
WARNING!
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition
is in the ACC position (even though the engine will be off).
Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition
is
OFF (not in ACC position) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are
applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine
must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
9-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The
transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the LOW
position manually downshifts the transmission to a lower
gear based on vehicle speed. The transmission gear range
(PRNDL) is displayed both above the gear selector and in
the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply
rotate the gear selector. Push down on the gear selector
and then rotate it, to access the L position. You must also
press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK (or NEUTRAL, when stopped or moving at low
speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such
as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the
proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
The 9-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles.
Software and calibration is refined to optimize the
customer’s driving experience and fuel economy. By
design, some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize
NINTH gear only in very specific driving situations and
conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
Transmission Gear Selector
GEAR RANGES
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the
selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is espe-
cially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition off.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition
to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that
limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
Ú page 154.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
Ú page 256.
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics
under all normal operating conditions.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller may modify the
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or
expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement.
This is done to prevent transmission damage due to
overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light will illuminate, a
warning message will appear in the instrument cluster,
and the transmission may operate differently until the
transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission temperature
as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm-up time
of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency.
Engagement of the torque converter clutch, and shifts into
EIGHTH or NINTH gear, are inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm
Ú
page 120. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
LOW (L)
Use this range for engine braking when descending very
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will
downshift for increased engine braking. To access the
LOW position, push down on the gear selector and rotate
it fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the
transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that
you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission. If
the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
engine and/or transmission is warm (usually after 1 to
3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed
is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged,
it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly
when the vehicle is cold. This is normal. The torque
converter clutch will function normally once the powertrain
is sufficiently warm.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD).
The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional
driving skills required. Under normal driving conditions,
the front wheels provide most of the traction. If the front
wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to
the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancellation
system. This system is designed to address exhaust and
engine noise. The system relies on four microphones
embedded in the headliner, which monitor exhaust and
engine noise, and assists an onboard frequency
generator, which creates counteracting sound waves in
the audio system’s speakers. This helps keep the vehicle
quiet at idle and during drive.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide increased
vehicle response and ease of maneuverability. The power
steering system adapts to different driving conditions.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “Power Steering
System Over Temp” message is displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, this indicates an over
temperature condition in the power steering system. Once
driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle
idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off
Ú page 102.
If the “Service Power Steering" or "Power
Steering Assist Off - Service System” message
and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, it indicates that the
vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance
Ú page 102.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no longer oper-
ational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
The power steering system is fully electric; it requires
no power steering fluid.
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is designed to reduce fuel
consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal, pressing
the accelerator pedal or shifting out of DRIVE (D) will
automatically re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty starter,
enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts to
handle the additional engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every driver key
start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/START
READY and if all other conditions are met, can go into a
STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE.
To Activate Auto STOP/START, The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster within the Stop/Start section
Ú page 102.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the
zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained throughout the Auto Stop/Start process.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause premature wear of the driveline
components.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions for Stop/Start and ensure
they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the operation
of the Stop/Start system may be viewed in the instrument
cluster display Stop/Start screen. Situations when the
engine will not stop include (but not limited to):
If Stop/Start is manually disabled by the Stop/Start
OFF button.
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low. During this time a message will
display “Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charging”.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept-
able cabin temperature has not been achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temperature is too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been achieved from
previous Autostop.
Steering angle is beyond threshold.
Vehicle is at too high of an altitude.
Ambient temperature is beyond operating range.
Stop/Start related system malfunction.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the accelerator pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage
upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop:
The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low. During this time a
message will display “Stop/Start Not Ready Battery
Charging”.
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
Stop/Start related system malfunction.
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Button
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The “STOP/
START OFF” message will appear in the instrument cluster
display and the Autostop mode will be disabled
Ú page 102.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the ON
mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and back ON.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
After turning off the Stop/Start system, push the Stop/
Start OFF switch again (located on the switch bank). The
light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “Service STOP/
START System” message and a yellow Stop/Start telltale
will appear in the instrument cluster display
If the “Service STOP/START System” message appears in
the instrument cluster display, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the vehicle
may not auto start and will need a key start.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a time.
For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is enabled,
Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable, and vice
versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control. The
cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button
a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on
level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always turn the system
off when you are not using it.
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is released,
the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down
hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, or pushing the CANC button, or
normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise Control
system without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the OFF
position erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise
Control function performs differently
Ú page 123.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need
to reset your Cruise Control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor
and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle
directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected
Ú page 312.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel operate
the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead and,
most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion and death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehi-
cles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for approximately three minutes in the stop posi-
tion. If the target vehicle does not start moving
within three minutes the parking brake will be
activated, and the ACC system will be canceled.
You should not utilize the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp; when
driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered,
slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
WARNING!
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Decrease
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Increase
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster displays the current ACC system
settings. The information it displays depends on ACC
system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button until
one of the following displays in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the gear selector is in PARK, REVERSE or
NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum speed
range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster will read
“ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
show “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the
ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the
Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to)
Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave
the system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will not
react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even
if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph
(32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20 mph
(32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can cause
the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs, the message “Driver Override” will
display in the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while an ACC is enabled, the system will not be
controlling the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be deter-
mined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The instrument cluster display will display the last
set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being
used.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is at a standstill longer than two
seconds, the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reen-
gage the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) to the existing
set speed.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and
road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is
too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+) button or SET (-)
buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
When you use the SET
(-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following the vehicle in front. If your vehicle
follows the vehicle in front to a standstill, after two
seconds the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reen-
gage the ACC to the existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the instrument cluster displays the ACC Set
With Target Detected Indicator Light, and the system
adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the
distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages
Ú page 126.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however,
the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system
applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that
its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the
set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a
warning for the driver to take action and does not neces-
sarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) engaged
and following a vehicle, the system will provide an
additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist
in passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is
triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and
will only be active when passing on the left hand side.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following the vehicle in front, your vehicle
will resume motion, without the need for any driver action,
if the vehicle in front starts moving within two seconds.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply
the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing
set speed.
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a standstill for
approximately three consecutive minutes, the parking
brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be
canceled.
While the ACC system is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the parking brake will be activated, and
the ACC system will be canceled.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR” WARNING
The “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
show “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels with
reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see an authorized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket
grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every
trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstructions,
have the radar sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/AEB Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and a chime will sound
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield, driving directly into the sun
and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the
instrument cluster display will show “ACC/AEB Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the system will
have degraded performance.
The “ACC/AEB Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/AEB Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstructions, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW
Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal
system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If
this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need
to intervene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stability,
with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is out of
the curve, the system will resume your original set speed.
This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There
may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle
you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is
stopped in your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect movement
from it. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear, and
if equipped, the front fascia/bumper and a detected
obstacle when backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a
parking maneuver). The vehicle brakes may be
automatically applied and released when performing a
reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible
collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can override the automatic braking function
by pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its capacity
during the braking event, turning ParkSense off via the
ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the auto-
matic brakes are being applied.
Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
The automatic braking function may not provide
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a
detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road
conditions, and brake capability.
The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for moving obstacles that approach the rear of
the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect system.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected
obstacles when backing up in REVERSE.
NOTE:
The system is designed to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle's movements.
For limitations of this system and recommendations, see
Ú page 136.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in
REVERSE and above the system's operating speed, a
warning will appear in the instrument cluster display
indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The six ParkSense sensors (four when vehicle is not
equipped with front sensors), located in the rear fascia/
bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors located in the
front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front and behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
front sensors detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from the front
fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. These distances
depend on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle in the horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle
is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
based on the object’s distance and location relative to the
vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following charts show the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None
Single 1/2 Second
Tone
(for rear center only)
Slow
(for rear center only)
Slow
(for rear center only)
Fast
(for rear center only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance (inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches (120-100 cm) 39-25 inches (100-65 cm) 25-12 inches (65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Uconnect system
Ú page 157.
If the Uconnect system is equipped, chime volume
settings will not be accessible from the instrument cluster
display.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected in the Uconnect system
Ú page 157.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
Ú page 97. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected
obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch located below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display
will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
NOTE:
When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense system
will reject customer input to turn the system off via the
switch. The instrument cluster display will show
"KeySense in Use Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled"
message.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message for five seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
display will show a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" pop-up message for five seconds. After five
seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with a "WIPE
OFF" or “SERVICE” overlay, depending on the location and
fault type. The system will continue to provide arc alerts for
the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts will
interrupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" messages if an object is detected within the
five second pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will
remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS"
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an
authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an
authorized dealer.
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper are free
of snow, ice, mud, dirt, and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE posi-
tion and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the appropriate fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the appropriate fascia/
bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc., are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in
the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving. This may cause the automatic braking
application to be delayed.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the contin-
uous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
WARNING!
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking
maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,
providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling the
steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver maintains
control of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes.
Depending on the driver's parking maneuver selection, the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable of
maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular
parking space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger
side).
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
The system is designed to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the
system will cancel, and the driver will be required to
manually complete the parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. environ-
mental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if
searching for a parking space that has surfaces that
will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
New vehicles from the dealership must have at least
30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system is fully calibrated and
performs accurately. This is due to the system’s
dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the perfor-
mance of the feature.
The use of wheels and tires that are different size to the
original equipment could affect the operation of the
system.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
P
ARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled
and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch,
located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch once (LED turns on). Pushing the
switch a second time will disable the system
(LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
Parking maneuver is completed.
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space.
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active steering guidance into the parking space.
Steering wheel is touched during active steering guid-
ance into the parking space.
ParkSense switch is pushed.
The driver’s door is opened.
The liftgate is opened.
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking System
intervention.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum numbers of shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within
eight shifts, the system will cancel and the instrument
cluster display will instruct the driver to complete the
maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate
and search for a parking space when the following
conditions are present:
The gear selector is in DRIVE.
The ignition is in the RUN position.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
The driver’s door is closed.
The liftgate is closed.
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
The outer surface and the underside of the front and
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstructions.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
turn off if any of the above conditions are not present.
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately 15 mph
(25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will instruct the
driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approxi-
mately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The
driver must then reactivate the system by pushing the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING
S
PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK for
Perpendicular Park” or “Active ParkSense Searching -
Push OK for Parallel Park” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display. Push the OK button on the left
side steering wheel switch to change your parking space
setting to parallel or perpendicular. Once the driver
pushes OK for a perpendicular parking maneuver, the
“Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK for Parallel Park”
message will appear in the instrument cluster display.
Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for Perpendicular
Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for Parallel Park
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for
a parking space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or
protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tail-
gates, etc., from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When searching for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular or
parallel parking sequence (depending on the type of
maneuver being performed).
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
the steering wheel. When the vehicle comes to a standstill
(your hands still removed from the steering wheel), you will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for steering
to complete before then instructing to check surroundings
and move backward.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space
The system may instruct several more gear shifts (DRIVE
and REVERSE), with hands off of the steering wheel,
before instructing the driver to check surroundings and
complete the parking maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the maneuver
is complete and the driver will be instructed to check the
vehicle's parking position, then shift the vehicle into PARK.
The message "Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position" will be displayed momentarily.
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking
maneuver.
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and stop
the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings
and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within
six shifts, the system will cancel and the instrument
cluster display will instruct the driver to complete the
maneuver manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always check
carefully behind and in front of your vehicle, look
behind and in front of you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up and moving forward. You
are responsible for safety and must continue to pay
attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors will
not be detected when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It
is recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). It
uses a forward facing camera to detect lane markings and
measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form
of torque applied to the steering wheel, as well as a visual
warning in the instrument cluster display, to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying force to the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts across that lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic or a torque warning will
not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel and provide an audible and visual
warning to the driver when the driver’s hands are not
detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if
the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A
“LaneSense On” message is shown in the instrument
cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button again (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system state on
or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense Tell-
tale is solid white only when the left lane marking
has been detected and the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an
unintentional lane departure occurs on the left side.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
visual warning in the instrument cluster display will
show the left inside lane line flashing yellow (on/off),
while the outside lane line on the left of the display will
remain solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/
Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for
a right lane departure when only the right lane marking
has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in
the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left inside and outside lane lines turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Drift With Solid Yellow Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left inside lane line flashes yellow (on/off) while the left
outside line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense tell-
tale changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At
this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/Flashing Yellow
Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for
a right lane departure.
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity
of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 157.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
The warnings are disabled with use of the turn signal.
The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes,
Traction Control System, Electronic Stability Control,
Forward Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along
with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across
the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located
on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable
modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 157.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned on, the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
A touchscreen X button to disable the camera image is
made available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE gear.
Display of the camera image after shifting out of REVERSE
can be disabled through the camera settings menu with
the Uconnect system.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Camera system that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the surroundings and Top View of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a different view is
selected through the touchscreen buttons. The Top View
of the vehicle will show which doors are open. The image
will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a
caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top
of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
The Surround View Camera system is comprised of four
sequential cameras located in the front grille, rear liftgate
and side mirrors.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera system has programmable
settings that may be selected through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 157.
Press this button on the touchscreen to enter
the Surround View Camera menu in the
Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear View
and Top View is the default view of the system.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned on, the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. There is
a touchscreen X button to disable the display of the
camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned off, the Surround View system is exited and
the last known screen appears again.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
through the Back Up Camera button in the Controls menu,
and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal to, 8 mph
(13 km/h), a display timer for the image is initiated. The
image will continue to be displayed until the display timer
exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h),
the Rear View Camera image will be displayed continu-
ously until deactivated via the touchscreen X button,
the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen X button to disable display of the
camera image is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including the side
view mirrors and its projected back up path based on the
steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Modes Of Operation
Manual activation of the Surround View system is selected
by pressing the Surround View Camera button located in
the Controls screen within the Uconnect system.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with Rear
View and Front View in a split screen display. There is
integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front and
rear of the vehicle. The arcs will change color from yellow
to red corresponding the distance zones to the oncoming
object.
Surround View Camera View
NOTE:
Front tires will be in image when the tires are turned.
Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the image
will appear distorted.
Top View will show which sliding doors are open.
Open front doors will remove outside image.
Rear View Plus Top View
This is the default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the Top
View of the vehicle with optional active
guidelines for the projected path when
enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path button will give
the driver a wider angle view of the Rear View.
The Top View will be disabled when this is
selected.
Front View Plus Top View
The Front View will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle and is
always paired with the Top View of the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path button will give
the driver a wider angle view of the Front View.
The Top View will be disabled when this is
selected.
Back Up Camera View
Pressing the Back Up Camera button will
provide a full screen rear view with Zoom View.
Zoom View
When the Rear View is being displayed, and the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear selector
position, Zoom View is available. By pressing the
“magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the display
screen, the image will zoom in to four times the standard
view. Pressing the icon a second time will return the view
to the standard Rear View.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay will
display the standard Rear View. If the vehicle is then
returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View
selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until the
gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds
are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated under the following
conditions:
The speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph
(13 km/h).
The vehicle shifted into PARK.
The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE and the
touchscreen X button is pressed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually
through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 157.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see an
authorized dealer.
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a FamCam system that
consists of an interior monitoring camera mounted on the
headliner that allows you to view cargo/passengers in the
rear interior of the vehicle through the Uconnect screen.
To activate the feature, press the FamCam button under
“Controls” in the Vehicle Menu of the Uconnect system
Ú page 157. Alternatively, the feature can be accessed
through the App Drawer or a shortcut for the feature can
be added to the Favorites bar at the top of the screen for
quick access.
The display will show the entire vehicle cabin view on the
left side of the display, and a zoomed-in view of a selected
seat on the right side of the display.
FamCam Display (7 Passenger Vehicle Shown)
To change the seat shown in the zoomed-in view, press a
different seat location on the left side of the display. The
zoomed-in view will then show the new seat location. By
default, the second row driver’s side seat will be displayed
in the zoomed-in view.
The display will appear in color in well-lit conditions and
will appear black and white in low-light conditions.
If the driver shifts into REVERSE or presses the
touchscreen X button, the view will close. Otherwise, the
FamCam view will remain on the display.
NOTE:
When FamCam is turned off, the selected seat in the
zoomed-in view on the right side of the display will be
retained. The next time the feature is activated, the same
seat will be shown in the zoomed-in view.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Surround View Camera. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should only
be used as a parking aid. The Surround View camera
is unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using Surround View to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using Surround View.
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the pipe
seal the system.
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the ignition OFF.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door
(3 o'clock position) and release to open.
Fuel Filler Door
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe; the
nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors while
refueling.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds after the
nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from the nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the center-rear edge
(3 o’clock position) of the fuel filler door and then
release. The fuel filler door will latch closed.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel filler
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
filler door around the perimeter to break the ice buildup.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), front and rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear GAWR. Total load must be limited so GVWR and front
and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the
fuel tank after filling.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then
be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or
rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within
the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
NOTE:
Trailer towing is not permitted for the Plug-in Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (PHEV).
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This
includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The
total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR
Ú page 146.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or
the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control.
Overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo,
consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary)
loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the
trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR
Ú page 146.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by
the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on
your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The Frontal Area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
The electronic TSC (if equipped), recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes
and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the
trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A Weight-Carrying Hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are commonly used to tow small and medium
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The
addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. TSC and a
weight-distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier TW and may be required
depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to
comply with GAWR requirements.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
Weight-distributing systems may not be compatible
with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire And Loading Infor-
mation Placard.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Engine/Transmission Trailer Tow Package GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW
3.6L/Automatic
Yes 8,600 lb (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,600 lb (1,632 kg) 360 lb (163 kg)
No 6,500 lb (2,948 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 1500 lb (680 kg) 149 lb (67 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING CHART
Follow these steps to determine the total weight the
vehicle can carry:
1. Determine the cargo capacity of your vehicle.
Load Capacity = GVWR – Curb (weight of vehicle,
full fluids, no occupants).
2. Determine occupant count.
For calculation purposes, average weight of an
occupant is 150 lb (68 kg).
EXAMPLE:
GVWR = 6,005 lb (2,723 kg)
CURB = 4,500 lb (2,041 kg)
Load Capacity = GVWR – CURB = 6,005 lb (2,723 kg) -
4,500 lb (2,041 kg) = 1,505 lb (682 kg)
4 Occupants (at 150 lb [68 kg]) + Max Trailer =
1,505 lb (682 kg) – 600 lb (272 kg) (4 x 150 lb [68 kg]) –
360 lb (163 kg) (10% of 3,600 lb [1,632 kg]) =
545 lb (247 kg) of cargo in vehicle
Make sure loading does not exceed GAWR of front or rear axles.
GAWR is found on the certification label affixed to the driver’s side door jamb.
Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants Max Cargo No Trailer
Max Trailer TW, Max
Trailer
Max Cargo With Max
Trailer TW 360 lb
(163 kg)
2 People / 300 lb (136 kg) 1205 lb (546 kg)
1,205 lb (546 kg) –
360 lb (163 kg) = 845 lb
(383 kg)
845 lb (383 kg)
4 people / 600 lb (272 kg) 955 lb (433 kg)
955 lb (433 kg) – 360 lb
(163 kg) = 545 lb
(247 kg)
545 lb (247 kg)
7 people / 1050 lb (476 kg) 455 lb (206 kg)
455 lb (206 kg) – 360 lb
(163 kg) = 95 lb (43 kg)
95 lb (43 kg)
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds
to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle
Ú page 288.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in “Scheduled Servicing”
Ú page 259. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo
that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can
occur that may be difficult for the driver to control.
You could lose control of your vehicle and have a
collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-
sion, chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or
"chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
WARNING!
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
For further information
Ú page 291.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do
not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lb (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance.
When towing, you should allow for additional space
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
(or any other device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connectors) before launching a boat into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing up
the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. For increased engine braking on steep
downhill grades, select the LOW range.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
To avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake (EPB) engage-
ment, you must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear
wheels are on the ground). The Auto Park Brake feature
is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable
features
Ú page 158.
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commercial
towing service, for further information Ú page 256.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will
result.
Recreational Towing
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are
OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four
wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this
procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the transmission in PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground FWD Models AWD Models
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front OK
NOT ALLOWED
Rear
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drive-
train will result. If this vehicle requires towing, make
sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
Ensure that the EPB is released, and remains
released, while being towed.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
start the vehicle.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Turn the ignition OFF.
11. Release the brake pedal.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or
using a towing dolly) is
NOT ALLOWED. The only
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another
vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the
ground.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be
observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with
ANY of its wheels on the ground
can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer
unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow,
wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
4
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow
standing water, consider the following Warnings and
Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water
can wear away the road or path's surface and cause
your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore,
flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away
swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
157
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5 With
7-inch Display or Uconnect 5/5NAV With 10.1-inch Display
system, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and
takes appropriate steps as needed. As always, if you
experience unusual behavior, contact an authorized
dealer immediately,
Ú page 308, or refer to your
Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for additional contact
information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or www.driveuco-
nnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow
you to access and change the Customer Programmable
Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER control knob
located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the center of
the control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into your
vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
immediately.
5
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 MULTIMEDIA
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the
screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s faceplate
for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display
For the Uconnect 5 With 7-inch Display and the Uconnect
5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings tab on
the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available
programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting
is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to the screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of
the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
MULTIMEDIA 159
KeySense
The vehicle’s KeySense settings are protected by a unique four-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the specific settings for the first time. This four-digit PIN
can only be reset by an authorized dealer.
After pressing the KeySense button on the touchscreen, and entering the KeySense PIN, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert
sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view,
and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system
signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Warning Only”
setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning +
Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when
a collision is detected.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected. The
“Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when an object is detected. The
“Sound and Display” setting will provide both an audible chime and a visual display when
an object is detected.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
5
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 MULTIMEDIA
My Profile
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a vehicle’s
blind spot. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside
mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors
and an audible chime.
Maximum Vehicle Speed
This setting adjusts the Maximum Vehicle Speed. This feature can be set to 65, 70, 75,
80, or 85 mph (90, 95, 100, 105 or 110 km/h) by using the “-” and “+” options.
Start Up Fuel Level Message This setting will turn the Start Up Fuel Level Message on or off.
Earlier Low Fuel Alert This setting will turn the Earlier Low Fuel Alert on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Français, Español, and Italiano.
Display Mode
The setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows for
more customization with the radio display.
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the theme of the radio.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
MULTIMEDIA 161
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are
“Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes
the theme with the headlights.
Units
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel
Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar),
“Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km,
or km/L) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
System Text Size
This setting will allow you to change the text on the radio to “Standard”, “Large”, and
“Taller”.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be
“Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour
format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition “Wake Up” word on or off.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition barge-in feature on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0
sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off With Door
This setting will turn the radio off when the driver or passenger door is opened. The
available settings are “On” and “Off”.
App Drawer Favoriting Popups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
Setting Name Description
5
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 MULTIMEDIA
Display
App Drawer Unfavoritings Popups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
New Text Message Popups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. This setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. This setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Popups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. This setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Settings This setting will allow you to customize the settings within Navigation Mode.
Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting
will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Audio Settings This setting will take you to the audio settings for the vehicle profiles.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Setting Name Description
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Français, Español, and Italiano.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
MULTIMEDIA 163
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it
automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the theme of the radio.
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are
“Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes
the theme with the headlights.
Units
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel
Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar),
“Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km,
or km/L) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five
seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-Ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-Ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
5
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking
Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert
sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view,
and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system
signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will
deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime
when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an
audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system “Off” or “Warning + Active
Braking”.
LaneSense Warning — Located In LaneSense Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane
departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength — Located In LaneSense Submenu
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane
departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected. The
“Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when an object is detected. The
“Sound and Display” setting will provide both an audible chime and a visual display when
an object is detected.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
MULTIMEDIA 165
Clock & Date
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Sliding Door Alert This setting will turn the Sliding Door Alert on and off.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will
activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights + Chime” setting
will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
KeySense This setting will access KeySense features.
Rear Seat Alert
When this setting is turned on and the rear doors are opened while the engine is running,
or if the engine is turned on within 10 minutes of the door opening, a message will
appear to check the rear seat when the vehicle is powered OFF.
Setting Name Description
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control
the time via the GPS location.
Set Time This setting will allow you to manually set the time of your clock.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour
format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date by day, month, and year (DD/MM/YY).
5
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting
to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the
hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Setting Name Description
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone.
The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The settings are “Auto Reply”
(both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply
Message” (create message).
Do Not Disturb All
This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb All” settings menu. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones
This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
MULTIMEDIA 167
Voice — If Equipped
Navigation — If Equipped
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition “Wake Up” word on or off.
Voice Barge-In This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition barge-in feature on or off.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and
provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the
Command List off.
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which icons
display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
5
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Surround View Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will
move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
MULTIMEDIA 169
Lights
Auto Folding Side Mirrors
This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when the vehicle is
turned off, the doors are locked, or the key fob button is pushed. The available options
are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Setting Name Description
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed
on the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Flash Lights With Sliding Door
This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door reverses. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
5
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed
on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off”
setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting
will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will
sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed
to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the
first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one
push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
MULTIMEDIA 171
Seats & Comfort
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked
to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Sliding Door Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the sliding door reverses or sense an
obstacle. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Flash Lights with Sliding Door
This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door is opening. Selectable options are
“On” and “Off”.
Hands Free Power Liftgate
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open the power liftgate.
Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Hands Free Power Sliding Door
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open the power sliding doors.
Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated or
the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting
will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
5
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options
Easy Exit Seats
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off.
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
3rd Row Seat Recline Lockout
This setting will activate the 3rd row seat recline lockout. Selectable options are “Off”,
“Lock On Ignition”, and “Always Locked”.
Setting Name Description
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when the ignition is
set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will
decrease the amount of time.
Radio Off With Door
This setting will turn the radio off when the driver or passenger door is opened. The
available settings are “On” and “Off”.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
MULTIMEDIA 173
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the
vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right
of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume
will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The
available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto On Radio
This setting will automatically turn on when the vehicle is in ON/RUN or will recall whether
it was on or off at last ignition OFF. The selectable options are “On”, “Off”, and “Recall
Last”.
Volume Adjustment
This setting allows you to adjust the volume levels for features such as Media, Phone,
Navigation, and Voice Recognition.
5
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 MULTIMEDIA
Notifications
SiriusXM® Setup
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
App Drawer Favoriting Popups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Popups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Popups
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected
phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone on or off.
Navigation Popups This setting turns navigation pop-ups on or off.
SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts
The setting turns receiving notifications for SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts on or off.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific radio
channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profiles & Settings
This setting will allow you to view your SiriusXM® account information, profiles linked to
the system, and the various settings you have saved and stored to those profiles.
Block Explicit This setting will allow you to block explicit content by turning it on or off.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
MULTIMEDIA 175
Accessibility — If Equipped
Software Updates
When pressing the Accessibility button on the touchscreen, the system will display options related to the vehicle’s theater system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Accessibility
The Accessibility feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected
when using DVD/Blu-ray™ and USB Video functions, when it is activated. For example,
when activated, and the Play button is selected, the system will announce “Play button
selected”, and then once pressed again the Play button will perform its action.
Video Button Readback This setting will turn the Video Button Readback feature on or off.
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display information on updating the Uconnect system’s software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options for the
setting are “On” and “Off”.
5
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 MULTIMEDIA
System Information
Reset
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Version Information
When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying
information about the version of your radio.
License Information
When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the
licensing information of your radio.
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can clear
personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Notifications Sounds Turn this setting on or off to hear notification sounds throughout your system.
Restart Radio This setting will restart the radio.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from
the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password for Projection This setting will reset your Wi-Fi password for projection.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
MULTIMEDIA 177
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) WITH
AMAZON FIRE TV BUILT-IN — IF EQUIPPED
OVERVIEW
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in is designed
to give your family years of enjoyment.
Fire TV lets passengers enjoy a wide variety of content
from popular apps (subscriptions may be required).
Stream videos, play games, listen to music, get
information, and watch downloaded programs all while on
the road. Two Voice Remotes with Alexa are included with
the system. Press the Microphone button on the Voice
Remote with Alexa to easily find, launch, and control
content. Check sports scores, play music, control smart
home devices, or see your live camera feeds (compatible
smart home device required and sold separately). In
addition to streaming and downloaded content, changing
the input in Fire TV also enables you to:
Play your favorite CDs, DVDs, or Blu-ray™ Discs.
Mirror what’s on your phone or tablet to Fire TV via
Miracast capable devices.
Plug and play a variety of standard video games or
devices into the HDMI port.
Listen to audio over wired or wireless headphones (not
included, customer will have to provide their own or
play audio through in-cabin speakers with Listen In
feature in front seat).
Plug and play a variety of devices into the front seat
Video USB port. USB ports located under the rear
screens are charge only.
Watch content individually on each rear display or
mirror across both displays to watch together.
NOTE:
Vehicle must be in an active and usable cellular range and
properly equipped with a Uconnect 5 NAV system and
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV package. Streaming
requires a Wi-Fi connection and registered Amazon
account to run Fire TV in the vehicle. Streaming service
subscriptions are not included. Services and features are
subject to change or withdrawal at any time, may not be
available in all areas and languages, and may require
separate subscriptions.
GETTING STARTED
Rear Seat Entertainment For Uconnect 5/5 NAV
Factory Reset
This setting will factory reset the radio. It may cause the radio to restart multiple times
and the backup camera, radio, SOS, and several driving assistance features will not be
available. Once the system resets, you will need to turn the vehicle off then back on to
complete the process.
Setting Name Description
1 — Rear Seat Entertainment (Rear Touchscreen)
2 — Headphone Jack
3 — HDMI Port
4 — USB C Charging Port
5 — Uconnect System (Front Touchscreen)
5
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 MULTIMEDIA
There are three different ways to operate the features of
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in:
Voice Remote with Alexa
Front radio screen
Individual rear touchscreens for Rear Seat Entertain-
ment with Fire TV built-in touch on each rear screen
ACCESSING REAR SEAT
E
NTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV BUILT-IN
FROM THE FRONT RADIO SCREEN
You can access your Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in system by following these steps:
Option 1
1. Press the Media button.
2. Press the Rear Seat button icon.
Option 2
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Uconnect Theater button on the
touchscreen. You may need to navigate to different
pages in the Apps drawer to find the Uconnect
Theater button.
ACCESSING REAR SEAT
E
NTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV BUILT-IN
FROM THE REAR SCREENS
You can access your Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in system from the rear screens by just flipping the
screens open. Flipping open the rear screens will
automatically turn the system on. Tapping either rear
screen will also turn on the system for that respective
screen.
NOTE:
When using the rear screens, the system will launch with
Fire TV.
FIRST TIME STARTING UP (USING THE
R
EAR SCREENS)
Boot-up Screen
When turning on the system for the first time from the rear
screens, a boot-up screen will appear on the system
displaying the Fire TV logo.
During this boot-up sequence, language options will be
available for the system.
Voice Remote with Alexa Pairing
After the boot-up sequence is complete, the system will
then give the option to pair a Voice Remote with Alexa (two
are included with the system).
Follow the on-screen instructions for how to pair a Voice
Remote with Alexa to the system. Two Voice Remotes with
Alexa are included to be paired with each rear screen.
A Voice Remote with Alexa can be paired to each rear
screen. It will function with the rear screen it was paired
with. The pairing steps will need to be done for each rear
screen.
NOTE:
If the Voice Remote with Alexa pairing fails, on-screen
instructions will appear for trying to pair again.
Connecting to a Network
During the start-up process, the system will need to be
connected to a network to function. Multiple network
sources can be options for the system.
Some options for a network connection are:
Wi-Fi Hotspot using a capable smartphone (if activated,
it will show as a possible network for the system on the
screen).
Outside connection like a home Wi-Fi network.
In-vehicle Wi-Fi.
NOTE:
When a network is connected to the system for the first
time, an over-the-air-software update will take place using
the Wi-Fi connection. It is recommended that an unlimited
Wi-Fi connection, if available, be used during this update.
After this first-time update, updates will only occur when
one is available.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
MULTIMEDIA 179
Account Sign-in
The next step will be the option to sign in to your Amazon
account.
There are two options to sign into the system:
I already have an Amazon account: Sign in with an
already existing Amazon account
I am new to Amazon: Create a new Amazon Account
If “I am new to Amazon” is selected, follow the on-screen
steps to set up an Amazon account with the system.
Parental Controls
Another feature that will appear during this first time set
up is parental controls.
When the parental controls page appears, it will give the
options “Enable Parental Controls” and “No Parental
Controls”. If “Enable Parental Controls” is selected, follow
the on-screen steps to set up parental controls for the
system.
ALEXA VOICE CONTROL
A feature with Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in that enhances your experience is Alexa. It is simple
to get started using this feature. Push the Microphone
button at the top of the Voice Remote with Alexa to
activate Alexa and get started.
LISTEN VIA VEHICLE SPEAKERS
A feature within Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in is the front radio Listen feature. On the front radio
Home screen for Fire TV, select the Listen button in the top
right corner on either card for Screen 1 or 2. This will allow
you to have either rear screen play audio through all the
speakers in the vehicle.
QUICK MENU
Accessing the quick menu will give you more options for
Fire TV.
To access the quick menu, tap the screen and it will
appear. The quick menu is also accessible by pushing the
Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote with Alexa.
Some options of the quick menu are:
Power — This will power the screen off.
On-Screen Remote — This will bring up the on-screen
remote to use with the system.
Back — This will let you go back a page.
Home — This will take you to the Home screen.
Gear/Settings — This will let you access certain settings
in the system. For more setting options, select
“Settings” within the on-screen Gear/Settings menu.
Vehicle — This will bring up the Vehicle menu. From
here you can adjust rear climate controls and the Are
We There Yet? app.
PARENTAL CONTROLS (USING THE REAR
S
CREENS)
If parental controls were not set during the first time start
up of the system, they can be set by following these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote
with Alexa or tap the screen to access Settings in the
“quick menu”.
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in Settings, select “Preferences”.
5. Select “Parental Controls”; from here you can turn
Parental Controls on or off and set up a PIN for the
controls using the Voice Remote with Alexa.
VOICE REMOTE WITH ALEXA PAIRING
(U
SING THE REAR SCREENS)
If the Voice Remote with Alexa needs to be paired again or
a new remote is being paired, follow these procedures:
1. Install batteries into the remote.
2. Tap the screen and Select the Gear/Settings icon on
the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. In Settings, select “Controllers & Bluetooth®
Devices”.
5. From this menu, select “Add New Remote”.
6. Follow the on-screen steps for Voice Remote with
Alexa pairing.
5
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 MULTIMEDIA
A long press on the Home button can also re-pair a Voice
Remote with Alexa that has become disconnected.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is included with two Voice Remotes with
Alexa. A Voice Remote with Alexa can be paired to each
rear screen. It will function with the rear screen it was
paired with. The pairing steps will need to be done for each
rear screen.
MEDIA SOURCES INPUT (USING THE
F
RONT RADIO AND REAR SCREENS)
Front Radio Screen
Inputs available within Launch Source under “Inputs” are
“Fire TV”, “HDMI”, “Blu-ray™”, “DVD”, and “USB”.
Rear Screens
To select inputs on the rear screen, scroll down on the Fire
TV Home screen and select your desired input under
“Input”.
Inputs can also be selected from the Brand tab in the top
menu. While in this tab, scroll down to “Inputs” for
selection options.
NOTE:
The Brand tab naming in the top menu will depend on the
naming of the vehicle’s brand.
VOICE REMOTE WITH ALEXA
Voice Remote With Alexa
1.
Power Button
— Turns the screen for the selected
channel on or off.
2. 5-way Navigation Control — This control has options
by pressing the Circle button Up, Down, Left, or Right
to navigate on-screen for selections and pushing the
center button to confirm selections.
3.
Back — Push to exit out of menus or return to the
previous screen.
4.
Home — Push to return to the Fire TV Home screen.
5.
Seek Backward/Rewind Button — Push and hold to
fast rewind through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to revert back to the previous
track.
6.
Volume — Push the - button to decrease the volume
and + button to increase the volume.
7.
Channel Guide — Push to access the channel guide
for the system.
8.
Mute — Mutes headphone audio.
9.
Prime Video — Push to launch Prime Video app.
10.
App 1 — Push to navigate to App 1.
11.
Microphone Button — Push to activate Alexa.
12.
Menu — Push to access the Fire TV menu.
13.
Seek Forward Button — Push and hold to fast forward
through the current audio track or video chapter.
Push once to skip to the next track.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
MULTIMEDIA 181
14.
Play/Pause Button ‖ — Begin/resume or pause disc
play.
15.
Channel +/- — Push the up or down arrow button on
the Channel button to browse channels available in
Fire TV.
16.
Recent — Push to access recently viewed content on
Fire TV.
17.
Gear/Settings — Push to bring up setting options for
Fire TV.
18.
App 2 — Push to launch App 2.
19.
Vehicle Button — Push to activate the Vehicle menu.
Replacing the Voice Remote with Alexa
Batteries
Each Voice Remote with Alexa requires two AAA batteries
for operation.
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
Voice Remote with Alexa, then slide the battery
cover downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recycling
procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown inside the
battery compartment.
4. Slide the battery compartment cover back on.
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE
TV
BUILT-IN STREAMING (USING THE
F
RONT RADIO AND REAR SCREENS)
Access Using Launch Source
To access Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in
from the front radio, press the Media tab located on the
bottom menu bar. Then select the Rear Seat option
located on the top menu bar. Select “Launch Source”, and
then under “Inputs” select “Fire TV Home”.
Access Using Browse Media
Selecting “Browse Media” on the front radio screen will
give access to different media within Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
These options will be in the top menu of “Browse Media”
and include:
Fire TV — Selecting “Fire TV” will show streaming
options for categories and to select apps. This option
will be selectable on the left slider menu in “Browse
Media”. While in “Browse Media” under Fire TV, it will
display recent activity under “Recent”. This will display
recent videos viewed from Fire TV and recent down-
loads as well.
USB Video — Under “USB Videos”, videos will appear
that are options with a USB device connected to Rear
Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
USB Music — Under “USB Music”, music will appear
that are options with a USB device connected to Rear
Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
Access Using the Voice Remote with Alexa and Rear
Screens
Rear passengers will be able to access some options for
streaming by pressing the “Prime Video”, “App 1”, or
“App 2” button on the Voice Remote with Alexa. Selecting
one of those buttons on the Voice Remote with Alexa will
take you to the home page for that respective streaming
service. Turning on either of the rear screens will launch
Fire TV. By default, the rear screens will always launch in
Fire TV. More streaming options can be selected on the
Fire TV home page.
Fire TV
Fire TV is your source for online streaming with Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
NOTE:
A data source needs to be connected to the system for
streaming to be accessible. This can be set up when Fire
TV is turned on for the first time from the rear screens.
Some of these options can be an in-vehicle 4G Wi-Fi hot
spot, capable Wi-Fi hot spot from a mobile device, or Wi-Fi
from an outside source like a home or a garage.
To access Fire TV on the front screen, select “Launch
Source” on the front touchscreen, rear seat screen, and
then “Fire TV Home” under “Inputs”.
Viewing from the front radio screen mirrors or controls the
Fire TV experience from one of the rear Fire TV displays.
The menu bar for Fire TV will have the options for “Home”,
“Find”, “Library”, “Brand”, and “Live”.
Below the menu bar will be streaming options linked to
your Prime account like “Prime Video”.
5
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 MULTIMEDIA
The front radio screen offers some options:
Power — This will turn Fire TV on or off.
Screen 1 and Screen 2 Toggle — This toggles between
the Rear Screens (for use with front radio screen only).
Collapse — While viewing on the front radio screen, this
will collapse the screen to dashboard view.
Source Drawer — This will open the “Source Drawer”
and the source logo will be displayed on the icon.
Browse Media — This will open the “Browse Media”
pop-up.
Back — This will let you go back the previous page.
Fire TV Home — This will take you back to the Fire TV
home page.
Menu — This will open the Fire TV menu.
Remote icon — This will display the on-screen remote.
NOTE:
Front radio screen mirroring and watching can only be
done when the vehicle is in PARK. The vehicle must be in
an active and usable cellular range and properly equipped
with a Uconnect 5 NAV system and Rear Seat Enter-
tainment with Fire TV package. For streaming, a Wi-Fi
connection and registered Amazon account are required
to run Fire TV in the vehicle. Streaming service subscrip-
tions are not included. Services and features are subject
to change or withdrawal at any time, may not be available
in all areas and languages, and may require separate
subscriptions.
PLAY A BLU-RAY™ OR DVD —
I
F EQUIPPED
Playing a Blu-ray™ or DVD from the Front Radio Screen
1. Insert a Blu-ray™ disc or DVD disc into the disc
player with the label facing up.
NOTE:
The DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc player is located under the radio
controls in the instrument panel.
2. Press the Media button on the bottom menu bar.
Then press the Rear Entertainment tab on the top
menu bar. Then select “Launch Source” on the radio
touchscreen.
3. Select the Blu-ray™ or DVD under inputs in the
Launch Source menu
4. To play a Blu-ray™ or DVD disc on both screens
simultaneously, select “Launch Source” and then
under Inputs, select “View Screen 1 or 2”.
DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc Player
NOTE:
To view video content on the radio screen, bring the
vehicle to a stop.
Playing a Blu-ray™ or DVD from the Rear Screens
1. Insert a Blu-ray™ disc or DVD disc into the disc
player with the label facing up.
2. Scroll down on the Fire TV Home screen and select
Blu-ray™ or DVD input under “Input”.
1 — DVD/Blu-ray™ Player
2 — USB Port
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
MULTIMEDIA 183
FIRE TV APPS/GAMES (USING THE
R
EAR SCREENS)
Apps and games can be accessed using Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
To access Apps on the rear screen, turn on the system and
select “Find” in the top menu. On the Find page, select
“App store®”. Within the App store® you can purchase
apps and games. From here you can also select from all
the apps and games that have been purchased.
USING THE VIDEO USB PORT
Plug in a USB drive or mass storage device and play your
favorite music or movies.
NOTE:
To view USB media on the rear screens, insert a USB drive
into the port next to the DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc player. The
USB drive port is located under the radio controls in the
instrument panel.
On the rear screen you can browse the content of the USB
device by going to the USB source in the inputs. Use the
search feature to find your media faster.
PLAY VIDEO GAMES
Connect the video game console to either of the HDMI
ports located behind either of the first row seats.
AUX/HDMI/USB
NOTE:
Certain high-end video games may exceed the power limit
of the vehicle's Power Inverter
Ú page 77.
HEADPHONES OPERATION
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in does not
come equipped with headphones. Customers will need to
provide their own wireless headphones that can be paired
with the system using Bluetooth®. Customers can also
use their own wired headphones and plug them into a
Headphone Jack located under one of the rear screens.
Wireless Headphones Pairing
To pair wireless headphones with Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV built-in using the rear screens,
follow these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote
with Alexa or tap the screen.
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in Settings, select “Controllers & Bluetooth®
Devices”.
5. Select “Other Bluetooth® Devices” and follow the
on-screen steps for pairing.
While multiple headphones can be paired, only one will
output audio at a time.
1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — HDMI Port
3 — USB Port (Charge Only)
5
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 MULTIMEDIA
REAR CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Rear Climate Controls can also be controlled using Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in Ú page 60.
Rear Climate Controls can be accessed by using the Vehicle menu. Tap on either rear screen and select the Vehicle icon or press the Vehicle button on the Voice Remote with Alexa.
Then select the Rear Climate Controls option.
Options within Rear Climate Controls include:
Icon Description
ON
Climate Control ON Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls on.
OFF
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
SYNC
SYNC Button
Pressing this button will sync both sides of the Rear Climate Controls.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between Manual mode and Automatic mode.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Press the button on the touchscreen to increase or decrease the temperature. The
temperature will get warmer as you move up toward the red arrow and colder as you move down toward the blue arrow.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
MULTIMEDIA 185
Headliner Mode
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
1,2,3, etc.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the Climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
Automatic mode to switch to Manual operation.
Icon Description
5
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 MULTIMEDIA
LEGAL & COMPLIANCE
To access Legal and Compliance information about Rear
Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in from the rear
screens, follow these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote
with Alexa or tap the screen.
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in the Settings menu, select “My Fire TV” and
then “Legal & Compliance”.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by repositioning the mobile phone within the vehicle. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily improve from
repositioning the mobile phone, it is recommended that
the volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further from
the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the
wireless radio
Ú page 312.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
187
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle
control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may continue
to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may
result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long
as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmit-
ting equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
WARNING!
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 SAFETY
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill
Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System
(TCS).These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic Steering
Torque (DST), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake
Support (RBS) and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
the rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit
of the system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump”
the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is
released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power Steering
(EPS) modules that provides torque at the steering wheel
for certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives
that the feature is active, is the torque applied to the
steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize the
correct course of action through small torques on the
steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the DST
feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and
overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very important
to realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle,
meaning the driver is still responsible for steering the
vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The EBD function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip
of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring
the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the
vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of
the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The
capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
SAFETY 189
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for
oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting these conditions. Engine power may also be
reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in
the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC
system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally
allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the ESC
OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate.
To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When driving with snow chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to allow
more wheel spin. This can be accomplished by momen-
tarily pushing the ESC OFF button to enter partial mode
“Partial Off” mode. Once the situation requiring “Partial
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pushing the ESC OFF button. This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel
lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel
lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle
control due to inappropriate driver input for the condi-
tions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
your vehicle, may change the handling characteris-
tics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the
performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance that
reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates that the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a reduced
mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the
ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off
previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop
while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake
pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE (R) gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section) has been disabled and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such
as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision
or serious personal injury.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
SAFETY 191
(Continued)
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
Ú page 157.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet conditions.
It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure
to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It
functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
speed. When RBS is active, there is no notification to the
driver and no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when
an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring
how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system will prepare the
brake system for a panic stop.
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA)
RSRA alerts you through a visual and auditory notification
of the possible presence of an object, passenger, or pet in
the rear seats if a rear door was opened up to 10 minutes
before the ignition was placed in the ON/RUN position.
RSRA does not directly detect objects, passengers, or pets
in the rear seats. When the previous conditions are met,
RSRA displays the message “Check Rear Seat” on the
instrument cluster display and sounds an auditory alert
upon the driver placing the ignition in the OFF position to
exit the vehicle.
To enable or disable RSRA, see
Ú page 157.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the
driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply
brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce
vehicle power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD) functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more vehicle torque to be applied to the wheel that
is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced
modes.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing
the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain
to place the transmission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into
PARK and apply the parking brake.
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
OFF position, key fob is removed from the vehicle
and vehicle is locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 SAFETY
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. Note that TSC cannot
stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when
towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight
recommendations
Ú page 147.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light will flash, the engine power may be reduced
and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual
wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside
the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that
enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the
vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to
let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear and enters standby mode when the vehicle is
in PARK (P).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.7 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rearview mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper
of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will
alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and
trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in false
detections. The BSM Warning Light may even remain
illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward
gear.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experi-
ence dropouts (blinking on and off) of the side mirror
warning indicator lights when a motorcycle or any small
object remains at the side of the vehicle for extended
periods of time (more than a couple of seconds).
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can
function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia/
bumper where the radar sensors are located with foreign
objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
SAFETY 193
If the system detects degraded performance due to
contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn you
of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in side
view mirrors will be on. The warning indicators will remain
illuminated until blockage clearing conditions are met.
First clear the fascia/bumper area around the sensors of
the blockage. After removing the blockage, cycle the
ignition from on to off and then back on again to reset the
system.
If the blockage message is still present after cycling the
ignition and driving in traffic, check again for a blockage.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume
Ú page 194.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between
the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the
warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 SAFETY
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, snow banks, car washes, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is
normal operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes
Ú page 312.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the
parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed.
The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross
traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the
driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver. Additionally, if your vehicle
is obscured by a flat object on one side the system can
false alert on vehicles approaching from the opposite
direction.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms,
including reducing the radio volume.
Blind Spot Modes
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help
detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system
is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance
over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
SAFETY 195
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
The BSM system can work in conjunction with the
KeySense function of the vehicle (if equipped)
Ú page 98.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver
when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings
and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with
enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential
collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to
calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the
system determines that a forward collision is probable, the
driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings
and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts
to the warnings by braking and the system determines
that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but
has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will
compensate and provide additional brake force as
required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
37 mph (60 km/h), the system may provide the maximum
braking possible to mitigate the potential forward
collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold
the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release
the brakes. If a pedestrian is encountered in the path at
the same speed threshold, the system will attempt to
bring the vehicle to a stop.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated
Ú page 312.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will
be deactivated until the next key cycle.
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 SAFETY
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in the
Uconnect settings.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you.
Changing the FCW status to “off” deactivates the system,
so no warning or active braking will be available in case of
a possible collision.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key
cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW can work in conjunction with the KeySense func-
tion of the vehicle (if equipped)
Ú page 98.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 157.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting and
the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Far", the system
provides possible collision warnings on objects farther
away. This results in earlier warnings and provides the
most reaction time to avoid possible collisions.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Near", the system
provides possible collision warnings on objects closer to
the vehicle. This results in later warnings and provides
less reaction time than the "Far" and "Medium" settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from providing autonomous braking, or additional
brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in
the event of a potential frontal collision.
The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rates of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality”, “FCW Limited Functionality”, “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”, or “FCW
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, the active braking may not be fully
available. Once the condition that limited the system
performance is no longer present, the system will return to
its full performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
FCW Unavailable Service Required
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
SAFETY 197
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) —
If Equipped
PEB is a subsystem of the FCW system which provides the
driver with audible and visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display, and may apply automatic braking when it
detects a potential frontal collision with a pedestrian.
PEB Message
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h),
the system may provide braking to mitigate the potential
collision with a pedestrian. If the PEB event stops the
vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at a
standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes.
When the system determines a collision with the
pedestrian in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph (5 km/h).
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the system
to warn you of a possible frontal collision with the pedes-
trian.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display in the
Controls settings
Ú page 157.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking OFF button.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning Active
Braking button.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the system,
so no warning or active braking will be available in case of
a possible frontal collision with the pedestrian.
NOTE:
The PEB system will NOT retain the last setting selected by
the driver after ignition shut down. The system will reset to
the default setting when the vehicle is restarted.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in
one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a graphic showing the
pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure
values in a different color, or the Uconnect radio will
display a TPMS message. When this occurs you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to
turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature decreases, the
tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be
set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
into the tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase
as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
See
Ú page 291 for information on how to properly inflate
the vehicle’s tires.
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect every
type of potential collision with a pedestrian. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling
the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 SAFETY
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the
tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure
in order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi
(165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the
TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value
Ú page 312.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels and may contribute to a poor overall
system performance or sensor damage. Customers
are encouraged to use Original Equipment Manufac-
turer (OEM) wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
SAFETY 199
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system
fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
being received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing
the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer
exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash, and
the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer
display, and a pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare — If Equipped
1. The compact spare tire does not have a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System sensor. Therefore, the
TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact
spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
Warning Light will remain on and a chime will sound.
In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will
still display a different color pressure value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds
and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact
spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In
addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit
in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW
PRESSURE WARNINGS
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound
when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display an "Inflate to XX" message
and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire
with the low tire pressure values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 SAFETY
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different
color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
instrument cluster will return to their original color, and
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
TPMS DEACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be
deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies
(road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not
have TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter wheel
and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensors. Then,
drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h).
The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of
the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display pressure values
in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed as long as no system fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child
restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position
Ú page 219.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint
Ú page 219.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
SAFETY 201
Ú page 308 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection
and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is
in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a
few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START
or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when an outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and
sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The
BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle
speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat
passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should
instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/
shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or
not an air bag is also provided at their seating posi-
tion to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
WARNING!
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
ries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
WARNING!
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
SAFETY 203
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
WARNING!
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately
above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats the shoulder
belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the
anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it
up or down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped
with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder
belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position
without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
Second Row Center (If Equipped) And Third
Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center (if equipped) and third row center
seat belts feature a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and
buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from the lower
anchor when the seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and
regular latch plate can then be stored out of the way in the
headliner for added convenience to open up utilization of
the storage areas behind the front seats when the seat is
not occupied.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
SAFETY 205
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
from its stowed position in the headliner slightly
behind the second or third row seat.
Mini-Latch Stowage
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over
the seat.
Mini-Latch Plate
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left head
restraint.
Routing The Rear Seat Belt Latch Plate
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to
go around your lap.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate And Buckle Connected
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 SAFETY
(Continued)
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the
lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate
into the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat
belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch
plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position.
Insert Regular Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle Slot To Detach
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if
they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder
belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place
the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not properly
connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant,
the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint
and will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate
and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occu-
pant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a colli-
sion. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap
belt is not long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
WARNING!
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
SAFETY 207
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed
air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. The
figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position
Ú page 228.
7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 SAFETY
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a park
stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to
occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the tight
installation of a child restraint, slide the latch plate over
the stitching to shorten the lap portion of the belt and
install the car seat normally. When the car seat is removed
from the vehicle, slide the latch plate above the park stitch
to enable occupants to latch the seat belt securely.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
Third Row Stow Clip — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on the lower
trim behind the third row. This clip is used to hold the seat
belt out of the path of the power folding third row seat.
Only place the seat belt webbing in this clip while folding
and opening the seat. Do not leave the webbing behind
the clip when using the belt to restrain an occupant.
Third Row Stow Clip
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
SAFETY 209
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC
position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power
or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/
RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning
Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any
part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light,
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial
startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the third row
stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an
occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned properly
on the occupant and they could be more seriously
injured in an accident as a result.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 SAFETY
(Continued)
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 102.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering
wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air
bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Passenger Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
SAFETY 211
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (OCS) that is designed to
provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce
substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The
front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink
your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belts even though you have air bags.
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 SAFETY
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation
rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS
estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front
passenger seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the
front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The
OCS communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce
the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may
result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the
most probable classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a
collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight
on the front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a full-power deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
Rear-facing child restraint
Reduced-power
deployment
Child, including a child in a
forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat*
Reduced-power
deployment OR Full-power
deployment
Properly seated adult
Full-power deployment OR
reduced-power
deployment
Unoccupied seat
Reduced-power
deployment
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
SAFETY 213
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument
panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 SAFETY
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel will
turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front
passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS may
affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or stays
on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you drive,
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service
immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed. Do not make
any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason, take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC
approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific
model being repaired. Always use the correct seat
cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an after-
market seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the
seatback in an upright position, your back against
the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the
center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or
near the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently
change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a
collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
SAFETY 215
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger
Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air
bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs
are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or
on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are
at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label
Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 SAFETY
(Continued)
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response to
impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side
Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left
side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or
killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from
the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat
belts properly and sit upright with their backs against
the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a
child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air
Bags.
WARNING!
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
SAFETY 217
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to
activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a
particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and
seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and
deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
deploy the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact
with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally
heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering,
see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irrita-
tion, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not
be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 SAFETY
(Continued)
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the inter-
vention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower
Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlight washer pump (if equipped)
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the
ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle elec-
trical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the
system by following the procedure described below. If you
have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be
towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have
the Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do
not modify the components or wiring, including
adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering
wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of
the instrument panel. Do not modify the front fascia/
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
SAFETY 219
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the acceler-
ator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identi-
fying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 SAFETY
(Continued)
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by
children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still
less than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have
not reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat
belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your
child may be more severely injured as a result.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
SAFETY 221
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing
in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have outgrown
the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the
seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat.
The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no
lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
SAFETY 223
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
Seven Passenger Bench Seat LATCH Positions
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating LATCH Positions 8 Passenger LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the center head
restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle can be removed if they
interfere with the installation of the child restraint. 2nd row
Stow 'n Go head restraints are not removable. The 3rd row
center head restraint is removable in all vehicles, but the
3rd row outboard head restraints are not removable
Ú page 45.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
SAFETY 225
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with
the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint
may be folded and the child seat installed in front of it.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage
symbols on the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
8 Passenger Seating
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Bench Anchorages Shown)
7 Passenger Bench Seating
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the
head restraint in its lowered position could result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 SAFETY
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
There are tether strap anchorages located
behind all second row seating positions. The
third row has a tether anchor on the 40% seat
for the right outboard position and in the center
of the 60% seat for either the center or left outboard
seating position. All tether anchorages are located on the
back of the seat, near the floor.
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Second Row Bench Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Second Row 7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Second Row 8 Passenger Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The
tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in the third
row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right
outboard position behind the front passenger (1).
Anchorages C and D are used for the center seating
position (2). The left outboard position (3) does not have
lower anchorages. Do not
install a child restraint using
anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH position in your
vehicle.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
SAFETY 227
Center Seat LATCH Positions
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the
seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not
use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do
not install a child seat in that outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 228 to
check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the
head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 231 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used
by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle
the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat
belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts
are not toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCH-compat-
ible child restraint in the center seating position (2).
Do not install a LATCH-compatible child restraint
using anchorages B and C. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please see
Ú page 227 for
typical installation instructions.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH
anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/
shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing
out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description for
additional information on ALR
Ú page 207.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SAFETY 229
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front of it.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward-facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the center head
restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle can be removed if they
interfere with the installation of the child restraint. 2nd row
Stow 'n Go head restraints are not removable. The 3rd row
center head restraint is removable in all vehicles, but the
3rd row outboard head restraints are not removable
Ú page 45.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright position when the seat is to be used by an occupant who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision.
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SAFETY
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you
may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. See
Ú page 231 for directions to attach
a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a park
stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to
occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the tight
installation of a child restraint, slide the latch plate over
the stitching to shorten the lap portion of the belt and
install the car seat following the steps above. When the
car seat is removed from the vehicle, slide the latch plate
above the park stitch to enable occupants to latch the
seatbelt securely.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SAFETY 231
(Continued)
If the park stitch interferes with the lock-off features of the
child restraint, do not use the lock-off feature. Instead,
switch the seat belt to the locking mode, as described in
the steps above or move the car seat to a different seating
position.
Seat Belt Park Stitch
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
Second Row Tether Attachment
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether
anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward
to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If
there is no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to another position
in the vehicle if one is available.
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 2nd Row Bench
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 2nd Row 8 Passenger
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 3rd Row
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap
of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is
approved for that seating position, located behind the top
of the vehicle seat. See
Ú
page 222 for the location of
approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
WARNING!
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 SAFETY
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Second Row 7 Passenger
Stow ‘n Go Anchorage Shown)
Third Row Tether Attachment
The tether anchorage found on the back of the 60% seat
in the third row may be used by either the left outboard or
the center seating position. Only tether one child restraint
to the tether anchorage at a time.
To connect the tether strap hook to the tether anchorage
for either seating position on the 60% third row seat:
1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and the child
seat.
2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the center head
restraint and route the tether strap around the
inboard (left) side of the head restraint support posts,
as shown in the diagram.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Center Tether Attachment – 3rd Row
Outboard Tether Attachments – 3rd Row
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not connect the tether strap for more than one child
restraint to the tether anchorage on the 60% seat in the
third row. This anchorage is intended for one child
restraint at a time.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
SAFETY 233
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection
& Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement
or “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú page 109.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
mode. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with
a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed. If
the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately
Ú page 200.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible
outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may
be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle
control could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so
it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack
an additional floor mat on top of an existing
floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA US LLC
approved floor mat for the specific make, model, and
year of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss
of vehicle control.
WARNING!
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SAFETY 235
(Continued)
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all
side windows fully open.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
6
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located in the
lower center area of the instrument panel.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
When the button is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when your
vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard warning for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may
wear down your battery.
SOS AND ASSIST MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
SOS And ASSIST Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an SOS and
ASSIST button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber
Ú page 312.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built in function.
Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your
SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network.
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 237
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be
a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a
call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
push the SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termination
of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the
Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the SOS and ASSIST
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional assistance is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS
operator may be able to open a voice connection
with the vehicle to determine if additional assis-
tance is needed. Once the SOS operator opens a
voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call
system, the operator should be able to speak with
you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds
occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator terminates
the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emer-
gency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the
vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec-
trical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
7
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between the SOS and
ASSIST buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that your
vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your provided
radio supplement for complete information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will be
connected to a representative for assistance. Road-
side Assistance will know what vehicle is being driven
and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside
assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror
light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the SOS Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 239
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care – Total support for Radio,
Phone and NAV issues.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —
IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Place the ignition in OFF mode.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the
driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the
passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being lifted or raised.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
pery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
7
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
JACK AND SPARE TIRE LOCATION
The jacking tools, spare tire and portable air compressor
(if equipped) or tire service kit (if equipped) are stowed
behind an access panel on the left hand side of the
vehicle.
Jacking Equipment Location
EQUIPMENT REMOVAL
1. Remove the access panel to the jacking equipment.
2. Unlatch the Portable Air Compressor or Tire Service
Kit if equipped. Unscrew the wing nut that is holding
the Inflatable Spare Tire and gently remove it from
the storage area. Remove wrench from foam tray.
NOTE:
Depending on the trim level of the vehicle, the options for
spare tire equipment may vary.
Jacking Equipment
Jacking Equipment
3. Turn the jack screw counterclockwise to remove the
jack from the storage area behind the tire.
Jack Location
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Tire Service Kit
3 — Wrench
4 — Fuel Filler Funnel
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Portable Air Compressor
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 241
Jack Warning Label
Detailed information about the inflatable spare tire, its
use, and operation
Ú page 295.
Extending The Wrench
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each
side of the vehicle body. These locations are on the
sill flange of the vehicle body.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations are
critical. See the following images for proper jacking loca-
tions.
Jacking Locations
Front Lifting Point
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
sion in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
7
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Jack Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn
clockwise until the jack head is properly engaged in
the described location.
Do not raise the vehicle until
you are sure the jack is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until
the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance
is obtained to install the compact spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts. For vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
6. Install the inflatable spare on the vehicle, located in
the rear cargo area of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could
be crushed. Never get any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a
raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can
be raised on a lift.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in serious injury.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 243
Mounting Inflatable Spare Tire
NOTE:
Do not install the wheel cover on the inflatable spare tire.
7. Leave the vehicle on the jack and start inflating the
inflatable spare after the tire has been mounted to
the vehicle. Secure the wheel to the hub by tightening
the nuts with the wrench. After inflation, once the
vehicle is lowered you will have a second opportunity
to torque the lug nuts
Ú page 303.
8. Inflate the tire to the prescribed pressure 60 psi
(4.2 Bar) using the Portable Air Compressor
Ú page 244 or Tire Service Kit if equipped
Ú page 245.
9. Lower the vehicle once the inflatable Spare has
reached its pressure and the compressor-hose has
been removed from the tire valve.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice
Ú page 303. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized
dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
12. Place the deflated (flat) tire and foam tray cover
assembly in the rear cargo area.
Do not stow the
deflated tire in the inflatable spare tire location. Have
the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as
possible.
13. Stow the jack back in the stowage compartment and
place the access panel back. The stud of the storage
area must be threaded through the lower part of the
jack. Then turn the Jack Screw clockwise to secure it
in place.
NOTE:
Stow the foam tray and components in the cargo area.
Storing The Jack
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if
the inflatable spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
3 — Stud
7
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ROAD TIRE INSTALLATION
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve
stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten all the
lug nuts until the wheel sits flush onto the hub and
there is no play. The nuts will have to be fully
tightened once the vehicle is lowered. Tightening an
improperly seated wheel under vehicle load can
damage the threads, cause vibration, and undermine
safety.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice
Ú page 303. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized
dealer or at a service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with
a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are
properly seated against the wheel.
PORTABLE AIR COMPRESSOR —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Portable Air
Compressor. Use the Portable Air Compressor located in
the side compartment of the cargo area to inflate the
inflatable tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar).
Portable Air Compressor
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Road Tire
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Wheel Lug Nut
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in serious injury.
1 — Power Plug
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Air Hose
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 245
Portable Air Compressor Usage With Inflatable Spare Tire
1. Remove the Portable Air Compressor from the
storage location.
2. Raise the vehicle as described in the
Jacking Instructions within this section.
3. Install the Inflatable Spare tire as
described in the Jack Instructions section
in this manual. Make sure that the valve
stem is located near the ground, and
then screw the air hose of the Portable Air
Compressor to the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and connect it
the vehicles 12 Volt power Outlet.
5. Always start the engine before turning
ON the Portable Air Compressor.
6. Switch the power button ON.
7. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar)
recommended as per the label on the
wheel or if the vehicle equipped with the
inflatable spare tire pressure indicated
on the Tire and Loading information label
located on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire is overinflated, use the deflation button to
reduce the tire air pressure.
8. After the tire reaches the
recommended pressure, lower the
vehicle with the jack as described in the
Jack Instructions section in this manual.
9. Remove the speed limit label sticker
from the Portable Air Compressor and
place it on the center of the steering
wheel.
10. Return the Portable Air Compressor to the foam tray
and secure it with the strap. Store the foam tray in the
cargo area.
RETURN INFLATABLE SPARE TIRE
To return Inflatable Spare Tire to its storage location.
1. Return the Jack.
2. Deflate the spare tire. Use the Tire Service Kit or
Portable Air Compressor and push the deflation
button to do this step. See the Portable Air
Compressor in this section for additional information.
The inflatable spare tire will return to its original
shape.
3. Install the inflatable spare tire back into its original
stowage location and position facing outward.
4. Install the foam tray with wrench and funnel installed.
5. Install and tighten the wing nut by hand.
6. Install the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air Compressor
(if equipped) and tighten the strap.
7. Install access panel door.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Tire Service Kit. Small punctures up to
1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign
objects (e.g., screws or nails) should
not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a
temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to
100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
WARNING!
Do not lift or carry the Portable Air Compressor by the
hose.
Always stow the Portable Air Compressor only in the
provided place.
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
Keep the Portable Air Compressor away from open
flames or heat source.
7
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Storage
Remove the rear panel to access the Tire Service Kit.
Tire Service Kit Access Panel Location — If Equipped
Tire Service Kit
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s trim level, Tire Service Kit
storage locations may vary.
Tire Service Kit Location — If Equipped
The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap, and is stored
under the load floor within the second row.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant/Air Hose
2 — Hose Accessories
3 — Mode Select Knob
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Deflation Button
6 — Power Switch
7 — Sealant Bottle
8 — Power Plug
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 247
(Continued)
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to
this position for air pump operation only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to
this position to inject the Tire Service Kit
Sealant and to inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and
release the Power Button again to turn Off
the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes overin-
flated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the
expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner
on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the
system. See the Sealant Bottle Replacement in this
section for further information.
The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and
needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace
these components immediately at your original equip-
ment vehicle dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and prop-
erly discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
Tire Service Kit.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal
punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the
tread/contact surface of your vehicle’s tires.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to seal
punctures on the tires' side walls.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump and make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the Air
Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
sealant into them.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
7
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of
the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button to set the
ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose onto the
valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the
plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power
outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from
the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before turning
the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the
Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button, the
sealant (white fluid) will flow from the
Sealant Bottle through the Sealant Hose
and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit
off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button to turn the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the vehicle is running before turning the
Tire Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use.
Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until
sealant is no longer flowing through
hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Hose, the Pressure Gauge can read as
high as 70 psi (4.8 bar). The Pressure Gauge will
decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi
(4.8 bar) to the actual tire pressure when the
Sealant Bottle is empty.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact
with clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
WARNING!
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 249
2. The pump will start to inject air into the
tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle
is empty. Continue to operate the pump
and inflate the tire to the cold tire
inflation pressure found on the tire and
loading information label located in the driver-side
door opening. Check the tire pressure by looking at
the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within
15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within 15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button
to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation
pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire
Service Kit off.
2. Remove the speed limit label from the
Tire Service Kit and place sticker on the
steering wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the
vehicle storage location.
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and
inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles
(8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of
the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning Flashers.
Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the
valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
Place the transmission in PARK (P) and cycle the igni-
tion in the OFF position.
Apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
If tire has improper inflation follow these next steps:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose onto the
valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the
plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power
outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at
the end of the hose onto the valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to
the Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure
to follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible
at an authorized dealer.
7
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the cold
tire inflation pressure found on the tire
and loading information label located in
the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button
to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation
pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at
the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering
wheel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized
dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Hose Location
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Remove The Bottle Cover
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
Rotate The Bottle Up
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
Remove The Bottle
NOTE:
For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps
reverse order.
Replacement sealant bottles are available at autho-
rized service centers.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 251
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located on the driver’s side of
the engine compartment.
Battery Location
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a protective
cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive
battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post which has a positive
(+) symbol on or around
the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and place the ignition to
OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cap over the
positive
(+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than
12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
7
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive
(+)
post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative
(-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper
cable to the remote negative
(-) post near the
windshield cowl (exposed metallic/unpainted post of
the discharge vehicle).
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, see the following discon-
necting procedure for the next steps.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the positive
(+) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery and reinstall the
protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system
inspected at an authorized dealer.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for a
Cap-Less Fuel System. If refueling is necessary, while
using an approved gas can, insert the refueling funnel into
the filler neck opening. Take care to open both flappers
with the funnel to avoid spills.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door
to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door by
pushing at the rear center edge to unlatch.
Refueling Funnel
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 253
(Continued)
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel is
provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the rear storage area.
Fuel Funnel Location
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors
open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by
an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating:
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
Strong smell of coolant
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the
fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WARNING!
7
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the temperature gauge is moving towards or close to the
HOT (H) position, you can reduce the potential for
overheating by taking the appropriate action.
On highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supple-
ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
To move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will
not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a depleted battery), a
Manual Park Release is available.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated
in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake, if possible.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
Manual Park Release access cover, which is to the
lower left of the steering column.
4. The Manual Park Release access cover is connected
to a red tether strap. Pull the tether strap out as far as
it will go, then release it. The transmission should now
be in NEUTRAL (N), allowing the vehicle to be moved.
Tether Strap
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released position, the
tether will remain outside of the trim panel and the access
cover cannot be reinstalled.
5. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
off immediately, and call for service.
WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot
firmly placed on the brake pedal to maintain control of
the vehicle before activating the Manual Park Release.
If possible, you should apply the parking brake.
Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your
vehicle to roll away if it is not secured or properly
connected to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park
Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 255
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated
in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back to its
original position.
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P).
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and
reinstall the access cover. If the access cover cannot
be reinstalled, repeat steps 1 through 4.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N)
for more than two seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE. Use the least
amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will main-
tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine.
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off” mode,
before rocking the vehicle
Ú page 189. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button again
to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for
at least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
7
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumper or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear wheels are on the ground), to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake (EPB) engagement.
The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical failure when the EPB is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle
onto a flatbed.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground FWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
ACCEPTABLE METHOD NOT ALLOWED
Rear
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 257
(Continued)
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all four
wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be
towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
raised).
NOTE:
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery Points that
can be used to recover a disabled vehicle, located on the
underbody of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are properly
seated and secured in the attachment points.
This recovery tow feature should be used by a trained
professional only.
Use approved receptacle location to free the disabled
vehicle from its environment.
Front Recovery Points
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
NOTE:
The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park Brake
whenever the driver's door is opened (if the ignition is ON,
transmission is not in PARK, and brake pedal is released).
If you are towing this vehicle with the ignition in the ON/
RUN mode, you must manually disable the Electric Park
Brake each time the driver's door is opened, by pressing
the brake pedal and then releasing the EPB.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery is
discharged, detailed instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK in order to move the vehicle
Ú page 254.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
Is NOT to be used to recover secondary vehicle.
Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over
the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
Is NOT to be used to recover secondary vehicle.
Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over
the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Recovery load should:
Be applied at constant speed.
Be applied parallel to the center line of the length of
the vehicle.
Not be an abrupt acceleration.
Be applied at constant speed.
Be applied parallel to the center line of the length of
the vehicle.
Not be an abrupt acceleration.
CAUTION!
7
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all four
wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes effect
in the event of an impact. Detailed information can be
found on
Ú page 218.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle. Detailed information can be found on
Ú page 219.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle using any other method can
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
259
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer towing, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
an authorized dealer
Ú page 97.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. If required, replace engine air cleaner filter.
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and replace if
necessary
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function X X X X X X X
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
Inspect front accessory drive tensioner, idler pulley, and replace if
necessary
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs
1
X
Replace the front accessory drive belt X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first
X X
Replace PCV valve X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Windshield Washer Reservoir Cap
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 8 — Battery
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low end
of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end
of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
Windshield Washer Fluid Cap
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual washer fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel, and wipe clean the
wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must
be exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water
Ú page 251.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may
void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids
Ú page 306.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by the
API. The manufacturer only recommends API trademark
oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies 0W-20,
0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 and
5W-40 engine oil.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
numbers should not be used.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the posi-
tive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and
connections however, the pressures generated by these
machines is such that complete protection against
water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
(Continued)
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters
should be used. If Mopar® Engine Oil Filters are
unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/
USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 260.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality Mopar® certified filters should be used.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across the ribbed surface of a belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also, have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords, or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
WARNING!
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
Belt broken
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is installed
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation).
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools; we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. It is recommended that air
conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information located online, for further
warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury
or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the blower
operating, the blower can contact hands and may
propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure
to replace the filter:
1. Remove all contents from the glove compartment.
Glove Compartment
2. Open the glove compartment door partially, leaving
extra slack on the glove compartment tension tether.
Detach the glove compartment tension tether by
sliding the black tension tether clip down, and
popping it out of the slot on the side of the glove
compartment door.
3. There are glove compartment travel stops on either
side of the glove compartment door. To release them,
push inward on each travel stop, and pull the glove
compartment door down until the travel stops pass
clear of their hooking points.
4. Open the glove compartment door as far as possible
to gain access to the cabin air filter compartment
cover.
Cabin Air Filter Compartment Cover
5. Pry up the lid of each individual compartment snap,
and detach it from the rest of the snap. There is a
small space on the side of each snap to use for
separating the lid from the snap. Once detached,
remove the rest of the snap completely from the
compartment cover.
6. After removing the snaps, lift up the compartment
cover to gain access to the fresh air inlet.
Fresh Air Inlet
7. Remove the filter cover by prying back each of the
retaining tabs from their hooking points, and then
pulling the filter cover out to expose the cabin air
filter. Remove the air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
8. Install the new air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether Clip
1 — Compartment Cover
2 — Compartment Snap
1 — Filter Cover
2 — Retaining Tabs
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate
airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly
install the filter will result in the need to replace it more
often.
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
9. Once the filter is replaced, reinstall the filter cover,
making sure the retaining tabs are fully secured into
their housings.
10. Close the cabin air filter compartment cover, and
reinsert the snaps into their slots. Push the snap lids
until fully attached.
11. Push the glove compartment door to the near closed
position to reengage the glove compartment travel
stops. Finally, pull the glove compartment tension
tether clip down and slide it back into the slot on the
side of the glove compartment door.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically. Use a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating,
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch release
mechanism, and safety catch should be cleaned and
lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots are present, clean the
wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the release tab on the wiper blade and while
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from
the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate
the wiper blade from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of
the wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the
blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the
windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against
the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and
snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass
unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp
the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper
arm with your right hand. With your left hand hold the
wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the
wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end
of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade,
move the wiper blade upward and away from the
wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass
unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the
wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade
flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have
the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to the manufacturer specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is
in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the
A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc.
If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you
Ú page 233.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn, such as grass or leaves, and
those items can come into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 260.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 306.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant,
may result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced
into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors
or anti-rust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radi-
ator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recom-
mended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using OAT
engine coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use
higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if tempera-
tures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please
contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact an
authorized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended and
can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT
coolant are mixed in an emergency, have an authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant will
return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank (if equipped).
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in
open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MAX”
and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper
level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers
of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating
on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter
the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum
of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. For
the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 260.
WARNING!
Do not open a hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build-up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly
a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the
brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking capacity
in an emergency.
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
Brake Warning Light is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid
level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to
fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer recommended brake fluid
Ú page 307.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the
vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer specified transmission fluid
Ú page 307. It is important to maintain the transmission
fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer recommended brake fluid
Ú page 307. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can
severely damage your brake system and/or impair its
performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in an open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause
it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the
chemicals can damage your transmission components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
(Continued)
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses, circuit
breakers and relays. A label that identifies each
component is printed on the inside of the cover.
Before any procedure is done on the PDC, make sure
engine is turned off.
Remove the cover by unlatching the two locks located at
each side of the PDC cover, avoid using screwdrivers or
any other tool to remove the cover, since they may apply
excessive force and result in a broken/damaged part.
After service is done, secure the cover with its two locks.
NOTE:
The function and amperage of the following fuses are
different, depending on vehicle trim level and content.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer
recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder
Ú page 307.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice
versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
WARNING!
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is
important to ensure the cover is properly positioned
and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the power distribution center and possibly result in
an electrical system failure.
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Power Distribution Center Location
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F06 – – Not Populated
F07 – 25 Amp Clear Ignition Coil / Fuel Injector
F08 – – Not Populated
F09 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier / Active Noise Control *
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
F10 – – Not Populated
F11 – – Not Populated
F12 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor (IBS)
F13 – 10 Amp Red ECM (S) *
F14 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F15 40 Amp Green – CBC / Power Locks
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F17 30 Amp Pink – Starter
F18 40 Amp Green – CBC / EXT LIGHTS
F19 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seats Solenoid LT *
F20 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seat Solenoid RT *
F22 – – Not Populated
F23 – – Not Populated
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper
F25 – 10 Amp Red
Hands-Free Dr Mod / Active Grille Shutter /
Pwr Mirror / VRM
F26 40 Amp Green – Front HVAC Blower Motor
F27 25 Amp Clear – RR Slide Door Module-RT *
F28 – 10 Amp Red
Diagnostic Port / USB+(IP) / Video USB
Port / Overhead DVD Player(Aftermarket)
F29 – – Not Populated
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Media HUB / Power Lumbar *
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F31 – – Not Populated
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F33 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module *
F34 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-LT *
F35 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof *
F36 – – Not Populated
F37 40 Amp Green – CBC / Exterior Lights
F38 60 Amp Yellow – Vacuum Cleaner *
F39 25 Amp Clear – Rear HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – – Not Populated
F41 – – Not Populated
F42 40 Amp Green – Folding Seat Module *
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F44 30 Amp Pink – CBC / Interior Lights
F45 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter *
F46 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F47 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F48 – – Not Populated
F49 25 Amp Clear – RR Sliding Door Module-LT *
F50 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-RT *
F51 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F52 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F53 – – Not Populated
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
F54 40 Amp Green – ESP-ECU And Valves
F55 – 15 Amp Blue
Radio Frequency HUB/ Keyless Ignition
System (KIN) / ESL / DVD
F56 – 10 Amp Red
Front and Rear HVAC Control Module /
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) /
Electronic Steering Lock (ESL) / ESP / ESC
F57 – – Not Populated
F58 – 10 Amp Red
Drive Train Control Mod / Power Transfer
Unit *
F59 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle *
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Cargo Pwr Outlet
F61 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn *
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Transfer Unit *
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn *
F64 – 15 Amp Blue RT HID Headlamp *
F65 – – Not Populated
F66 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster
F67 – 10 Amp Red
Haptic Lane Feedback Module (HALF) /
Parktronics System (PTS)/Drivers Assist
System Module (DASM)
F68 – – Not Populated
F69 – – Not Populated
F70 – – Not Populated
F71 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F72 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirror *
F73 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
F74 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights*
F75 – 5 Amp Tan Overhead Console / RR Center Stack
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow Uconnect / Center Display / Telematics
F77 – 10 Amp Red
RR Entertainment / Media HUB / USB(S) /
Rain Sensor / Sunroof / RR View Mirror/
Overhead DVD Player / INT Monitoring
Camera / Wireless Charging Pad
F78 – 15 Amp Blue TCM (ZF) / E-Shifter / Cluster
F79 – 10 Amp Red ICS / HVAC / SCCM/ EPB SW
F80 – – Not Populated
F81 – – Not Populated
F82 – – Not Populated
F83
20 Amp Blue – TT Park Lights *
30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer Pump *
F84 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control MOD *
F85 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F86 – – Not Populated
F87 – – Not Populated
F88 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats *
F89 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats *
F90 – – Not Populated
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
30 Amp mini fuse is substituted for 25 Amp Circuit Breaker.
F91 – 15 Amp Blue
Front Ventilated Seats/Heated Steering
Wheel *
F92 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F93 – – Not Populated
F94 40 Amp Green – ESC Motor Pump
F95A – 10 Amp Red USB Charge Port — ACC/RUN
F95B – 10 Amp Red
Selectable Fuse Location – USB IP (Direct) B+
F96 – 10 Amp Red Airbag
F97 – 10 Amp Red Airbag
F98 – 15 Amp Blue Left HID Headlamp *
F99 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Elect Brake Module *
F100 – 10 Amp Red
Headlamp Level / RR Camera / Blindspot /
Humidity SNSR / In Car Temp SNSR /
Headlamp SW *
Circuit Breakers
CB1 25 Amp Power Seats (Driver)
CB2 25 Amp * Power Seats (Pass)
CB3 25 Amp
FRT PWR Window W/O Door Nodes + RR
PWR Window Lockout
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part
Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section
includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. For replacement
of LED lamps, see an authorized dealer.
Interior Bulbs — Halogen
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. For replacement
of LED lamps, see an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs — Halogen
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly
counterclockwise, and then remove the front turn
signal lamp assembly from the lamp housing.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the
replacement bulb.
4. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly into
the housing, and rotate the front turn signal lamp
socket clockwise to lock it in place.
FRONT AND REAR SIDE MARKER LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel
liner and carefully peel back liner for access.
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Turn Signal Lamp WY21W / 7440NA
Front Side Marker Lamp W3W / 2821
Rear Side Marker Lamp W3W / 2821
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
2. Firmly grab the front side marker lamp socket and
rotate a quarter turn counterclockwise to remove it
from the lamp assembly.
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal
3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp socket
and replace with a new bulb.
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp
assembly and rotate a quarter turn clockwise to lock
into place.
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install the
three fasteners.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact
spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located
on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd
week of 1981 or 1991
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
The manufacturer recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire And Loading Information
Placard in this manual
Ú page 146.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Ratings (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing,
Ú page 146.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response
or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judg-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can
cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase
your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended
load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build-up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat tire is
changed after being driven in the Run Flat mode 14 psi
(96 kPa) condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it
is not designed to be reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on
a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode
Ú page 197.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other
types of tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not
spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously
when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced
Ú page 293.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle sched-
uled maintenance is highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when installing
new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends using tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed
Ú page 293. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire
Ú page 284.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when
ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information,
contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in
size and type to the original equipment tires.
Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This
can cause unpredictable handling and stress to
steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with
load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire
Ú page 245.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated
for temporary emergency use
Ú page 152.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
And Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17
101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle
and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not
hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice
or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment or
Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and
prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire And Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner
or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these recommendations to
guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
FWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(Maximum Projection Beyond Tire
Profile Or Equivalent)
Touring
Touring L
Front
235/65R17
235/60R18
9 mm Cable/Chain
Limited 235/60R18
AWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(Maximum Projection Beyond Tire
Profile Or Equivalent)
Touring
Touring L
Front
235/60R18
9 mm Cable/Chain
Limited 235/60R18
Pinnacle Not Chainable
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed
Ú page 259.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components, it
is important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). Auto-
sock traction devices do not require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three weeks,
we recommend that you take the following steps to
minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started
again.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons
are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,
and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to get rid of any deposits.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch the
paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint
and decals.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the belts
if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work
properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. If
your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar®
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any
foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than
darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning,
and the manufacturer recommends Mopar® total care
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or
ketone-based cleaning products to clean leather seats,
as damage to the seat may result.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
303
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel
and is visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function.
However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow or
stop, and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 ft-lb
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.5 19 mm
9
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/
bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly tightened.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see a dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emissions
regulations and provide optimum fuel
economy and performance when using high
quality unleaded regular gasoline having a
posted octane number of 87 as specified by
the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane premium
gasoline is not required, as it will not provide any benefit
over regular gasoline in these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 305
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Undesirable lean conditions
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
Poor engine performance
Poor cold start and cold drivability
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasolines to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life
and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to further
aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of meth-
anol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
9
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 19 gal 71 L
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 5 qt 4.7 L
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine 15 qt 14.2 L
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic
SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
Ú page 264.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not use E-85).
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 307
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion
protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or
any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used.
9
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for
an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you are
still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of
the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer center
should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on
the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in
your Warranty Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.
Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where services
are provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc., Thousand
Oaks, CA 91360.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 309
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of gas/
fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing as a
result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free: USA:
1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Provide your
name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) required for
covered services, license plate number, and your location,
including the telephone number from which you are
calling. Briefly describe the nature of the problem and
answer a few simple questions. You will be given the name
of the service provider and an estimated time of arrival. If
you feel you are in an unsafe situation, please let us know.
With your consent, we will contact local police or safety
authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you
may submit your original receipts from the licensed
towing or service facility, for services rendered within 30
days of the occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN,
odometer mileage at the time of service, and current
mailing address. We will process the claim based on
vehicle and service eligibility. If eligible, we will reimburse
you for the reasonable amount actually paid, based on
the usual and customary charges for that service in the
area where they were provided. FCA US LLC’s
determination relating to reimbursement is final.
Correspondence should be mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time.
The Roadside Assistance program is subject to restrictions
and conditions of use, which are determined solely by FCA
US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch a
service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare tire
(if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s Manual.
This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We will
dispatch a service provider to deliver a small amount of
fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a nearby station.
This service is limited to two occurrences in a 12-month
period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen locks
are keeping you from getting on your way, help is just a
phone call away. This service is limited to providing access
to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not cover the cost of
replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of
a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will
dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
If you choose to go to another dealer, you will be
responsible for the cost if the extra distance exceeds
10 miles.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
10
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 247-9753
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA US
LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and
for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans are the
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service contract, call
FCA US LLC's Service Contract National Customer Hotline
at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you
may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you
require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and
market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further
information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this vehicle
and market. Refer to owners.mopar.ca/en/ for further
information.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 311
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/
or components and is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it
easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
10
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have changed
your address, please provide the following information
and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
Vehicle Indentification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
Exact Odometer Reading
First and Last Name
Phone Number
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
313
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes ....................................................... 303
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) ... 123
, 124
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............................ 272
Additives, Fuel .............................................................. 305
Adjust
Down...........................................................................41
Forward ......................................................................40
Rearward....................................................................40
Up................................................................................41
Air Bag........................................................................... 210
Air Bag Operation.................................................... 211
Air Bag Warning Light ....................................209
, 211
Driver Knee Air Bag ................................................ 215
Enhanced Accident Response ......................218
, 258
Event Data Recorder (EDR).................................... 258
Front Air Bag ........................................................... 211
If Deployment Occurs ............................................. 217
Knee Impact Bolsters............................................. 214
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......................... 218
Maintenance........................................................... 218
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ......................... 210
Side Air Bags........................................................... 215
Transporting Pets.................................................... 233
Air Bag Light ...............................................102
, 209, 233
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ........... 265
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................................... 266
Air Conditioner Refrigerant.......................................... 266
Air Conditioner System ................................................ 266
Air Conditioning Filter ............................................71
, 266
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ....................................70
Air Filter .........................................................................265
Air Pressure
Tires..........................................................................291
Alarm
Arm The System.........................................................19
Disarm The System ................................................... 19
Security Alarm..........................................................105
All Wheel Drive
Towing ......................................................................258
All Wheel Drive (AWD)...................................................120
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.......................................................................... 8
Amazon FireTV .................................................... 177
, 181
Amazon FireTV Built-In .................................................177
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............................... 272
, 306
Disposal ...................................................................273
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....................................187
Anti-Lock Warning Light................................................105
Assist, Hill Start.............................................................190
Audio Jack .......................................................................74
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................................157
Auto Up Power Windows ................................................ 79
Automatic Dimming Mirror.............................................48
Automatic Headlights .....................................................56
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......................... 70
Automatic Transaxle.....................................................117
Automatic Transmission .............................................. 118
Adding Fluid....................................................274
, 307
Fluid And Filter Change........................................... 274
Fluid Change ...........................................................274
Fluid Level Check....................................................274
Fluid Type .......................................................274
, 307
Special Additives..................................................... 274
AutoPark ....................................................................... 111
AUX Cord ......................................................................... 74
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ...................... 75
AWD
Towing...................................................................... 258
Axle Lubrication ............................................................ 307
B
Back Up Camera...........................................................142
Battery..................................................................103
, 263
Charging System Light............................................ 103
Jump Starting ..........................................................251
Keyless Key Fob Replacement................................. 13
Battery Saver Feature .................................................... 57
Belts, Seat..................................................................... 233
Blind Spot Monitoring .................................................. 192
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...................................... 268
B-Pillar Location ...........................................................288
Brake Assist System.....................................................188
Brake Control System, Electronic................................188
Brake Fluid.................................................................... 307
11
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314
Brake System ......................................................273, 303
Anti-Lock (ABS)........................................................ 303
Fluid Check.....................................................274
, 307
Master Cylinder....................................................... 274
Parking .................................................................... 115
Warning Light.......................................................... 103
Brake/Transmission Interlock..................................... 118
Brightness, Interior Lights ..............................................58
Bulb Replacement ....................................................... 282
Bulbs, Light.......................................................... 235
, 282
C
Camera ......................................................................... 142
Camera, Rear ......................................................142
, 143
Capacities, Fluid........................................................... 306
Caps, Filler
Fuel.......................................................................... 146
Oil (Engine).............................................................. 262
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)................................... 272
Car Washes .................................................................. 300
Carbon Monoxide Warning.......................................... 235
Cargo
Vehicle Loading..........................................................86
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier..........................................................90
Cargo Load Floor.............................................................86
Cellular Phone .............................................................. 186
Certification Label........................................................ 146
Chains, Tire................................................................... 297
Change Oil Indicator .......................................................98
Changing A Flat Tire..................................................... 239
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................................................284
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) ......110
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety................................233
Checks, Safety ..............................................................233
Child Restraint ..............................................................219
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ..........................................................221
Center Seat LATCH..................................................226
Child Seat Installation................................... 228
, 230
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .................227
Infant And Child Restraints.....................................220
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children...............222
Older Children And Child Restraints.......................221
Seating Positions.....................................................222
Using The Top Tether Anchorage ...........................231
Clean Air Gasoline ........................................................304
Cleaning
Wheels .....................................................................296
Climate Control ............................................................... 60
Automatic................................................................... 61
Manual .......................................................................66
Rear..................................................................... 64
, 69
Cold Weather Operation...............................................113
Compact Spare Tire......................................................295
Contract, Service ..........................................................310
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..........................272
Cooling System ............................................................. 271
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze)....................................272
Coolant Level...........................................................273
Cooling Capacity...................................................... 306
Disposal Of Used Coolant.......................................273
Drain, Flush, And Refill ........................................... 272
Inspection.......................................................271
, 273
Points To Remember .............................................. 273
Pressure Cap...........................................................272
Radiator Cap............................................................272
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)..................272
, 306
Corrosion Protection ....................................................300
Cruise Control ...............................................................123
Cruise Control (Speed Control).................................... 124
Cruise Light..........................................................107
, 108
Customer Assistance ...................................................308
Cybersecurity ................................................................157
D
Daytime Running Lights................................................. 54
Dealer Service .............................................................. 264
Defroster, Windshield ..................................................234
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers............................................ 59
Diagnostic System, Onboard .......................................109
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ................................................................... 54
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) .............................................................. 263
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
315
Disable Vehicle Towing................................................ 256
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................................... 273
Door Ajar.............................................................. 103
, 104
Door Ajar Light.....................................................103
, 104
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ....................................................28
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water.................................................. 156
E
Electric Brake Control System..................................... 188
Anti-Lock Brake System ......................................... 187
Traction Control System......................................... 191
Electric Parking Brake ................................................. 115
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................................ 189
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light................... 104
Emergency Braking...................................................... 197
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher......................................... 236
Jacking............................................................239
, 240
Jump Starting.......................................................... 251
Overheating............................................................. 253
Towing ..................................................................... 256
Emission Control System Maintenance...................... 110
Engine............................................................................262
Air Cleaner ...............................................................265
Block Heater ............................................................114
Break-In Recommendations ...................................114
Checking Oil Level ...................................................263
Compartment...........................................................262
Compartment Identification....................................262
Coolant (Antifreeze).................................................306
Cooling .....................................................................271
Exhaust Gas Caution...............................................235
Fails To Start............................................................114
Flooded, Starting .....................................................114
Fuel Requirements..................................................304
Oil ................................................................... 264
, 306
Oil Filler Cap.............................................................262
Oil Filter....................................................................265
Oil Selection................................................... 264
, 306
Oil Synthetic.............................................................264
Overheating .............................................................253
Starting.....................................................................111
Engine Oil Life ¹...............................................................98
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............. 218
, 258
Ethanol ..........................................................................304
Exhaust Gas Cautions ..................................................235
Exhaust System .................................................. 235
, 270
Exterior Lighting .....................................................54
, 282
Exterior Lights .............................................. 54
, 235, 282
F
FamCam System .......................................................... 145
Filters
Air Cleaner ...............................................................265
Air Conditioning................................................71
, 266
Engine Oil.................................................................265
Engine Oil Disposal .................................................265
FireTV ............................................................................ 181
Flashers
Hazard Warning.......................................................236
Turn Signals................................... 54
, 108, 235, 282
Flash-To-Pass........................................................... 54
, 56
Flat Tire Changing ..................................... 239
, 283, 295
Flat Tire Stowage....................................... 245
, 283, 295
Flooded Engine Starting...............................................114
Fluid Capacities ............................................................ 306
Fluid Leaks.................................................................... 235
Fluid Level Checks
Brake........................................................................274
Engine Oil.................................................................263
Fluid, Brake...................................................................307
Fog Lights................................................................. 54
, 57
Fold In Floor (Stow ‘n Go) Seating................................. 36
Fold-Flat Seats................................................................ 28
Forward Collision Warning........................................... 195
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...............................................255
Front Position Light ......................................................282
11
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316
Fuel ............................................................................... 304
Additives.................................................................. 305
Clean Air .................................................................. 304
Ethanol .................................................................... 304
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)................................................ 146
Gasoline .................................................................. 304
Materials Added...................................................... 305
Methanol ................................................................. 304
Octane Rating ................................................304
, 306
Requirements ......................................................... 304
Specifications.......................................................... 306
Tank Capacity.......................................................... 306
Fuses ............................................................................ 275
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ...............................51
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............................................. 146
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................................ 304
Gasoline, Clean Air....................................................... 304
Gasoline, Reformulated............................................... 304
Gear Ranges................................................................. 119
Glass Cleaning ............................................................. 302
Gross Axle Weight Rating ............................................ 148
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ....................................... 147
GVWR............................................................................ 146
H
Hands-Free Sliding Door ................................................ 25
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water...................................................156
Hazard Warning Flashers.............................................236
Head Restraints ..............................................................45
Headlights .......................................................................54
Cleaning ...................................................................300
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ......................54
Lights On Reminder............................................ 54
, 57
Passing................................................................ 54
, 56
Switch.........................................................................54
Time Delay .................................................................54
Washers .....................................................................56
Heated Mirrors......................................................... 48
, 50
Heated Seats ..................................................................43
Heater, Engine Block ....................................................114
Hill Start Assist..............................................................190
Hitches
Trailer Towing ..........................................................149
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) ...............................51
Hood Prop ....................................................................... 82
Hood Release.................................................................. 82
I
Ignition ............................................................................ 15
Switch ........................................................................ 15
Indicator Lights
Blue..........................................................................109
Green ....................................................................... 107
White........................................................................108
Yellow....................................................................... 107
Inside Rearview Mirror .......................................... 48
, 236
Instrument Cluster .................................................. 94
, 96
Display ....................................................................... 97
Display Controls ........................................................ 97
Menu Items ............................................................... 99
Instrument Cluster ¹....................................................... 96
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .................................302
Interior And Instrument Lights....................................... 58
Interior Appearance Care............................................. 301
Interior Lights.................................................................. 58
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)............................... 59
Inverter
Power ......................................................................... 77
J
Jack Location ................................................................240
Jack Operation.............................................................. 239
Jacking And Tire Changing — If Equipped
b
............ 239
Jump Starting ...............................................................251
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
317
K
Key Fob............................................................................12
Arm The System.........................................................19
Disarm The Alarm ......................................................19
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........................14
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .........13
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ............14
Keyless Enter 'n Go™......................................................21
Passive Entry..............................................................21
Keys .................................................................................12
Keysense .........................................................................98
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals......................................54
Lane Change Assist .................................................54
, 57
LaneSense.................................................................... 140
Lap/Shoulder Belts...................................................... 202
Latches ......................................................................... 235
Hood ...........................................................................82
Lead Free Gasoline ...................................................... 304
Leaks, Fluid .................................................................. 235
Life Of Tires .................................................................. 293
Liftgate.............................................................................83
Hands-Free.................................................................84
Power..........................................................................83
Light Bulbs........................................................... 235
, 282
Lights.............................................................................235
Air Bag...................................................102
, 209, 233
Anti Lock Brake System ..........................................105
Automatic Emergency Braking OFF........................107
Battery Saver .............................................................57
Brake Assist Warning ..............................................190
Brake Warning.........................................................103
Bulb Replacement...................................................282
Cruise ............................................................. 107
, 108
Daytime Running....................................................... 54
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ........................................54
Electric Power Steering Fault..................................103
Electronic Park Brake..............................................105
Electronic Stability Control Active...........................105
Electronic Throttle Control ......................................104
Engine Temperature Warning.................................104
Exterior........................................................... 235
, 282
Fog.....................................................................57
, 108
Headlights........................................................... 54
, 56
High Beam ...............................................................109
High Beam/Low Beam Select .................................. 54
Hood Open...............................................................104
Instrument Cluster ....................................................54
Intensity Control ........................................................ 58
Interior........................................................................58
KeySense .................................................................108
LaneSense..................................................... 105
, 108
Liftgate Open...........................................................104
Lights On Reminder ........................................... 54, 57
Low Fuel................................................................... 105
Low Washer Fluid....................................................106
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ................... 106
Oil Pressure .............................................................104
Oil Temperature ...................................................... 104
Park..........................................................................108
Passing ............................................................... 54
, 56
Reading...................................................................... 58
Seat Belt Reminder.................................................104
Security Alarm .........................................................105
Service ..................................................................... 282
Service Automatic Emergency Braking..................106
Service AWD ............................................................106
Service LaneSense .................................................106
Service Stop Start System...................................... 106
Side Marker............................................................. 282
SmartBeams.............................................................. 56
Stop Start Active...................................................... 108
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ........................... 106
Traction Control.......................................................190
Transmission Temperature .................................... 104
Turn Signals................................... 54
, 108, 235, 282
Load Floor, Cargo ........................................................... 86
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode...................................101
11
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318
Load Shed Battery Saver On ....................................... 101
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction......................... 101
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ......................... 101
Loading Vehicle ..................................................... 86
, 146
Tires ......................................................................... 288
Locks
Automatic Door ..........................................................20
Child Protection .........................................................20
Manual .......................................................................20
Power Door.................................................................20
Low Tire Pressure System ........................................... 197
Lubrication, Body ......................................................... 268
Lug Nuts ....................................................................... 303
Luggage Carrier ...............................................................90
M
Maintenance ...................................................................81
Maintenance Free Battery........................................... 263
Maintenance Schedule................................................ 259
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)......106
, 110
Manual
Park Release........................................................... 254
Service..................................................................... 311
Map/Reading Lights .......................................................58
Marker Lights, Side...................................................... 282
Media Hub .......................................................................74
Memory Seat ...................................................................27
Methanol ...................................................................... 304
Mirrors .............................................................................48
Automatic Dimming................................................... 48
Exterior Folding.......................................................... 50
Heated.................................................................48
, 50
Memory ......................................................................27
Outside................................................................48
, 49
Rearview ...........................................................48
, 236
Vanity.......................................................................... 48
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle.......................................................................... 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.....................................197
Mopar Parts ..................................................................311
MP3 Control .................................................................... 74
Multi-Function Control Lever.......................................... 54
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period........................................114
O
Occupant Restraints.....................................................200
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .......................... 304
, 306
Oil Change Indicator .......................................................98
Reset .......................................................................... 98
Oil Filter, Change ..........................................................265
Oil Filter, Selection........................................................265
Oil Pressure Light..........................................................104
Oil, Engine............................................................264
, 306
Capacity ...................................................................306
Checking..................................................................263
Dipstick.................................................................... 263
Disposal...................................................................265
Filter.........................................................................265
Filter Disposal..........................................................265
Identification Logo ..................................................264
Materials Added To.................................................265
Pressure Warning Light ..........................................104
Recommendation...........................................264
, 306
Synthetic..................................................................264
Viscosity...................................................................306
Onboard Diagnostic System ........................................109
Operating Precautions .................................................109
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ...................................................... 311
Outside Rearview Mirrors ....................................... 48
, 49
Overheating, Engine.....................................................253
P
Paint Care ..................................................................... 300
Parking Brake ...............................................................115
ParkSense
Front And Rear ........................................................132
ParkSense Active Park Assist...................................... 137
ParkSense System, Rear .............................................132
Passive Entry .................................................................. 21
Pets ............................................................................... 233
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......................288
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
319
Power
Brakes ..................................................................... 303
Inverter .......................................................................77
Mirrors ........................................................................49
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .............................75
Seats....................................................................40
, 42
Steering ................................................................... 121
Power Seats
Down...........................................................................41
Forward ......................................................................40
Rearward....................................................................40
Up................................................................................41
Power Sliding Door
On / Off Switch....................................................24
, 83
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts................................ 206
Preparation For Jacking............................................... 239
Pretensioners
Seat Belts................................................................ 207
R
Radial Ply Tires............................................................. 292
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)......................... 272
Radio Operation ........................................................... 186
Rear Air Conditioning...............................................64
, 69
Rear Camera ................................................................ 143
Rear Cross Path ........................................................... 194
Rear ParkSense System.............................................. 132
Rear Seat Entertainment............................................. 177
Rear Seat Reminder .................................................... 191
Rear View.........................................................................48
Reclining Front Seats .....................................................29
Recreational Towing .....................................................154
Reformulated Gasoline ................................................304
Refrigerant ....................................................................266
Release, Hood................................................................. 82
Reminder, Lights On.......................................................54
Reminder, Seat Belt .....................................................201
Remote Control
Starting System ......................................................... 16
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm ........................................................... 19
Disarm The Alarm......................................................19
Programming Additional Key Fobs........................... 14
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode............................................17
Remote Starting System ................................................16
Replacement Bulbs ......................................................282
Replacement Tires........................................................293
Reporting Safety Defects .............................................311
Restraints, Child ...........................................................219
Restraints, Head.............................................................45
Roof Luggage Rack......................................................... 90
Rotation, Tires...............................................................298
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.......................................233
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ....................................234
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................................311
Safety Information, Tire................................................283
Safety Tips.....................................................................233
Safety, Exhaust Gas .....................................................235
Schedule, Maintenance...............................................259
Screen Setup ................................................................100
Seat Belt Reminder...................................................... 104
Seat Belts.............................................................201
, 233
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ........................................204
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage.................. 204
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage..........204
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)........................207
Child Restraints.......................................................219
Energy Management Feature.................................207
Extender...................................................................206
Front Seat............................................. 201
, 202, 203
Inspection................................................................233
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................................203
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................................204
Lap/Shoulder Belts.................................................202
Operating Instructions ............................................ 203
Pregnant Women ....................................................206
Pretensioners ..........................................................207
Rear Seat.................................................................202
Reminder .................................................................201
Seat Belt Extender ..................................................206
Seat Belt Pretensioner............................................ 207
Untwisting Procedure.............................................. 204
Seat Belts Maintenance ..............................................301
11
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320
Seats..................................................................28, 40, 43
Adjustment...................................................28
, 29, 40
Heated........................................................................43
Memory.......................................................................27
Power...................................................................40
, 42
Rear Folding...............................................................28
Reclining.....................................................................29
Seatback Release...............................................28
, 29
Stow ‘n Go (Fold in Floor)..........................................36
Tilting ...................................................................28
, 29
Security Alarm .............................................................. 105
Arm The System.........................................................19
Disarm The System....................................................19
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)................................ 306
Sentry Key (Immobilizer).................................................15
Service Assistance ....................................................... 308
Service Contract........................................................... 310
Service Manuals........................................................... 311
Shifting
Automatic Transmission......................................... 118
Shoulder Belts.............................................................. 202
Side View Mirror Adjustment..........................................48
Signals, Turn........................................54
, 108, 235, 282
SmartBeams....................................................................56
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)........................................... 297
Snow Tires .................................................................... 294
Spare Tire Changing .................................................... 239
Spare Tire Stowage...................................................... 245
Spare Tires .................................................240
, 295, 296
Specifications
Oil............................................................................. 306
Speed Control
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ...........................................127
Cancel ......................................................................124
Resume....................................................................124
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ....................................124
Starting...................................................................16
, 111
Button......................................................................... 15
Cold Weather ...........................................................113
Engine Fails To Start ...............................................114
Remote.......................................................................16
Starting And Operating.................................................111
Starting Procedures......................................................111
Steering .........................................................................121
Tilt Column................................................................. 26
Wheel, Heated ........................................................... 26
Wheel, Tilt .................................................................. 26
Storage ............................................................................ 71
Storage, Vehicle..............................................................70
Stow ‘n Go (Fold In Floor) Seats ....................................36
Stow ‘n Vac......................................................................86
Streaming......................................................................177
Stuck, Freeing...............................................................255
Sun Roof................................................................... 80
, 81
Sunglasses Storage........................................................ 71
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag..................210
Surround View Camera ................................................143
Sway Control, Trailer.....................................................192
Symbol Glossary ............................................................... 8
Synthetic Engine Oil......................................................264
System, Remote Starting ............................................... 16
T
Telescoping Steering Column........................................ 26
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ......................... 70
Tilt Steering Column....................................................... 26
Time Delay
Headlight ................................................................... 54
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........................288
Tire Markings................................................................283
Tire Safety Information ................................................283
Tire Service Kit .............................................................245
Tire Service Kit — If Equipped
b
...............................245
Tire Stowage .................................................................245
Tires................................................... 234
, 291, 295, 298
Aging (Life Of Tires).................................................293
Air Pressure ............................................................. 291
Chains......................................................................297
Changing..................................................................239
Compact Spare........................................................295
General Information.......................................291
, 295
High Speed ..............................................................292
Inflation Pressure.................................................... 291
Jacking............................................................239
, 240
Life Of Tires .............................................................293
Load Capacity.......................................................... 288
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).....99
, 106, 197
Quality Grading........................................................298
Radial....................................................................... 292
Replacement ...........................................................293
Rotation ...................................................................298
Safety..............................................................283
, 291
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
321
Sizes ........................................................................ 284
Snow Tires............................................................... 294
Spare Tires ............................................240
, 295, 296
Spinning .................................................................. 292
Trailer Towing.......................................................... 152
Tread Wear Indicators............................................ 293
Wheel Nut Torque................................................... 303
To Open Hood..................................................................82
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................................... 151
Towing........................................................................... 147
Disabled Vehicle ..................................................... 256
Guide ....................................................................... 149
Recreational............................................................ 154
Weight...................................................................... 149
Towing Behind A Motorhome ...................................... 154
Traction......................................................................... 155
Traction Control............................................................ 191
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ........................................... 192
Trailer Towing ............................................................... 147
Hitches .................................................................... 149
Minimum Requirements ........................................ 151
Tips .......................................................................... 153
Trailer And Tongue Weight..................................... 151
Wiring....................................................................... 152
Trailer Towing Guide .................................................... 149
Trailer Weight ............................................................... 149
Transaxle
Automatic ................................................................ 117
Operation................................................................. 117
Transmission.................................................................118
Automatic....................................................... 118
, 274
Maintenance............................................................274
Transporting Pets .........................................................233
Tread Wear Indicators..................................................293
Turn Signals ................................................. 54
, 108, 282
U
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch Display...............158
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features.......................... 21
Passive Entry Programming......................................21
Uniform Tire Quality Grades.........................................298
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) —
If Equipped
b
...............................................................51
Unleaded Gasoline .......................................................304
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt..................................204
USB..................................................................................74
V
Vacuum ........................................................................... 86
Stow ‘n Vac ................................................................ 86
Vanity Mirrors..................................................................48
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................303
Vehicle Loading................................................... 146
, 288
Vehicle Maintenance....................................................264
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ................................... 8
Vehicle Storage...............................................................70
Ventilated Seats .............................................................44
Voice Command..............................................................47
Voice Recognition System (VR)......................................47
W
Warning Lights
Red...........................................................................102
Yellow....................................................................... 105
Warning Lights And Messages .................................... 102
Warranty Information ................................................... 310
Washers, Windshield ...................................................263
Washing Vehicle ...........................................................300
Water
Driving Through.......................................................156
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .........................................296
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim..........................................296
Wind Buffeting................................................................ 79
Window Fogging ............................................................. 70
Windows.......................................................................... 78
Power ......................................................................... 78
Windshield Defroster ................................................... 234
Windshield Washers ............................................. 59
, 263
Fluid .........................................................................263
Windshield Wiper Blades.............................................268
Wipers Blade Replacement .........................................268
Wipers, Intermittent ....................................................... 59
Wireless Charging Pad ................................................... 77
Wrecker Towing ............................................................ 256
11
23_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal
injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any
electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous
and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote
your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or
texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common
questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler
brand dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-800-247-9753 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a
replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If
you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license. Chrysler est une marque
déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
SCAN FOR THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaUSA
mopar.com/om
First Edition V1
_RUP_OM_EN_USC
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or
scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make
and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
